Svayambhu: Digital Critical Edition and Translation of an Old Javanese Juridical Text

Editors: Arlo Griffiths, Timothy Lubin.

Identifier: DHARMA_CritEdSvayambhu.

Languages: Old Javanese, Sanskrit, Source.

Repository: Nusantara Philology (tfd-nusantara-philology).

Version: (eaf0a4a), last modified (623a3d6).

Edition

avighnam astu.
Account of Dharma vyavahārān didr̥kṣus tu brāhmaṇaiḥ saha pārthivaḥ | mantrajñair mantribhiś caiva vinītaḥ praviśet sabhām || MDhŚ 8.001 kunaṅ ulaha saṅ prabhu, uniṅānira taṅ vyavahāranikaṅ rāt, arovaṅa ta sira brāhmaṇa vihikanvikan maṅaji, lavan mantri vruhmantri riṁ vruḥmantrinira vruḥ mavivekamavikveka:, sulakṣaṇaa ta sira tumamaa riṅ sabhā. tatrāsīnaḥ sthito vāpi pāṇim udyamya dakṣiṇam | vinītaveṣābharaṇaḥ paśyet kāryāṇi kāryiṇām || MDhŚ 8.002 aliṅgihāpagəhahaliṅgihapagəhahaliṅgiḥ pagəha: ta sira riṅ sabhā, taṅanira təṅən atah ulahakənira, hayvātuduh-tuduh*hayva tuduḥtuduḥ kivakita, bhūṣaṇa-pahyasniṅ vvaṅ suśīlātahsugiḥla:taḥ lviranira, iṅət-iṅətənirātah yogyāyogyanihogya:yogyaniṁ kāryanikaṅ mavyavahāra kālih. pratyahaṁ deśadr̥ṣṭaiś ca śāstradr̥ṣṭaiś ca hetubhiḥ | aṣṭādaśasu mārgeṣu nibaddhāni pr̥thak pr̥thak || MDhŚ 8.003 *sari masihamasita sirān ṅiṅət-iṅəta makasādhanaṅmakasa:danaṁmakasḍanaṁ varah-varahvaravaraḥ saṅ hyaṅ āgama mānavādimanava:vīnavavi, mvaṅ sakinapagəhakənikaṅ sapañjiṅsaṁ mañjiṁ deśanya, deśa ṅaranya, sakaḍaṅayansadaṅayanNone of the witnesses transmit the syllable ka that we conjecture on the basis of epigraphic evidence, especially the Sima Anglayang charter (14r1): sapinasukniṁ yavadvĭpa kabeḥ, lasun·, paḍa, paṅkaja, kanuruhan·, lamajaṁ, panumbaṁṅan·, pavuyahan·, deśa luvuk·, vuravan·, kaḍaṅayan· kabeḥ., sajasun-sajamus-vuṅkal, savuravansavagavan, sakanuruhan, anndan hana *kaparəkanya deniṅ āgama, ya ikahika:tika deśadr̥ṣṭa ṅaranya, an tanhankan deśa sasiki svadeśanikaṅ mavyavahāravyava:haravya:vaharavyavaharaThe conjecture seems necessary because svadeśa normally figures in possessive constructions with nouns indicating categories of people. Note that the same omission of prefix (m)a- is observed in §§ 26, 46, 159., aṣṭādaśasu mārgeṣuAṣṭadaṣasu marggehaṣṭa:deṣa:su ma:rggeastadasasu marge, irikā sthānaniṅ vyavahāra vvaluvaluriṁ valu vlas kvehnya, salviraniṅ vicāraniṅsalviriṅ vyavahāra, hana tinəmunya ṅkāna salah siki, paḍa madudva-dudvanpadudvadudvanpada padudvan-dudvan viṣayanya. hiṁsāṁ yaḥ kurute kaś cid deyaṁ vā na prayacchati | sthāne te dve vivādasya bhinno ’ṣṭādaśadhā punaḥ || This stanza is absent from Olivelle's constituted text, though it is referenced in his app. crit. for one manuscript. The stanza occurs in ed. Mandlik 8.4 with reading bhinno, where the Svayambhu implies bhinne. hiṁsāṁ yaḥIṅsīyaIṅsa:ya kurute kaś cit, hana vvaṅ mamatyani nirdoṣa, kunaṅnirdoṣa:, maṅlarani nirdoṣa, kunaṁIt is possible that the absence of the phrase maṅlarani nirdoṣa in and results from eyeskip. But as long as we do not understand how the three manuscripts relate to each other, it seems more likely that reflects an elaboration that captures two possible understandings of hiṁsāṁ kurute. deyam vāva na prayacchatiprayaścatiprayasati, tan paveh irikaṅ yogya vehakənavehikna, aveh irikaṅ tan yogya vehakənanya kunaṅ, sthānesvane te dve vivādasyavamvadasya, ya ikahikaṁ sthānaniṅ vyavahāra, rvaṅ siki mūlanyamalanya, bhinnebhinebane ’ṣṭādaśadhāṣṭedaśada:ṣṭedaśadastedasadan punaḥ, matəmahan ta ya vvalu vlas vəkasan. teṣām ādyam r̥ṇādānaṁ nikṣepo ’svāmivikrayaḥ | saṁbhūya ca samutthānaṁ dattasyānapakarma ca || MDhŚ 8.004 vetanasyaiva cādānaṁvetanasya na ca dānam saṁvidaś ca vyatikramaḥ | krayavikrayānuśayo vivādaḥ svāmipālayoḥ || MDhŚ 8.005 sīmāvivādadharmaś ca pāruṣye daṇḍavācike | steyaṁ ca sāhasaṁ caiva strīsaṁgrahaṇam eva ca || MDhŚ 8.006 strīpuṁdharmo vibhāgaś ca dyūtam āhvayaāhvānam eva ca | padāny aṣṭādaśaitāni vyavahārasthitāv ihavyavahārasthitāni ha || MDhŚ 8.007 lvirnya, teṣām ādyamtapīmadyamtepaṁ*m adyamtesanmadyam r̥ṇādānamr̥ṣada:nīr̥sadanaṁ*rənanam, tan kasahuraniṅ hutaṅ kasahurapihutaṁ kasahurapyutaṁ kasuhuraniṁ pyutaṁ Our conjecture is inspired by a passage in the p. 30: maṅkana kagavayaniṅ yajñadharma, mvaṅ kasahuraniṅ utaṅ. , ādiniṅ vyavahāra. nikṣepa, tan kavehaniṅ patuvavakatuvava. asvāmiastami-vikraya-vikriya-vikrya, adval tan dravya. sambhūya casa:mbhūyasyasambuyasyaAll mss. point to sambhūyasya, analogous to dattasya but ungrammatical. samutthānamsamūrtthaniṁsamūtthanaṁ*samurtanam, tan kaduman ulihiṅ kinabehan. dattasyānapakarmadattasyanasaka:rmmadattasyana: karma ca, *karuddhāniṅkaradḍaniṁkarudahiṁ huvus vinehakən. vetanasyaveka:nasya na ca dānamdaniṁAll mss. indicate that this was the received Sanskrit text, which makes perfect sense, but is nevertheless problematic because it is unmetrical., tan kavehaniṅtavehaniṁ upahan. samvidaś ca vyatikramaḥ, advā riṅ samaya. krayavikrayānuśayo-krayanūṣa:yoḥ-kraya:nuṣa:yoḥ-krayanusayoḥ, alarāmbəknyān-nya padvalnya, paməlinya kunaṅ. vivādaḥ svāmipālayoḥviva:dḍaḥ sva:miphalayaḥviva:dḍaḥ svamiphalayaḥvitadaḥ svamipalayaḥ, vivādaniṅvivana:daniṁ *pinaṅvanakən mvaṅ maṅvan. sīmāvivādadharmaś ca, kaücapaniṅ vatəs. pāruṣye daṇḍavācike, ḍaṇḍaniṅ sāhasasa:ha:rṣasaha:rṣasatarsa, vākpāruṣya. steyamstheyamsveyamsteyəm, pavr̥ttiniṅ maliṅ. sāhasam, ulah sāhasa. strīsaṁgrahaṇam eva casaṅgrahaname Uva:cca:saṅgrahaname Uva:ccasaṅgrahaname uvaca, ulah tan yogya riṅ strī, strīpuṁdharmo, dharmaniṅ laki-strī. vibhāgaśvinagaś ca, kadumaniṅ dravya. dyūtamdyuta, totohan tan prāṇi. āhvānamAhvanam·The vulgate reading of MānDhŚ is āhvaya here, but several mss. used by share the reading with n that seems to have been received on Bali., totohan prāṇi. padānypadabadam aṣṭādaśaitāni, nahan ta vvaluva:luvalu vlas lvirnya. vyavahārasthitāni haThe vulgate reading of MānDhŚ is vyavahārasthitāv iha here, but it seems that the text received on Bali had the reading that we adopt here. Olivelle’s ms. Be1 has the variant -sthitāni ca., byakta pinakasthānaniṅpinaka:stana: vyavahāra. eṣu sthāneṣu bhūyiṣṭhaṁ vivādaṁ caratāṁ nr̥ṇām | dharmaṁ śāśvatam āśritya kuryāt kāryavinirṇayam || MDhŚ 8.008 eṣuEvuUvu sthāneṣustha:neṣṭa bhūyiṣṭhambhuya:ṣṭiṁbhūyaśṭaṁ*buyastam, ikaṅ vyavahāravyavavu-sthāna vvaluva:luvaluvalu vlas, kapva hana katəmunya ṅkānatatmunya ṅkanatatmunya ṅhana Cf. §3 hana tinmunya ṅkāna., kapagəhakənakapagəhana saṅ prabhu, yuktinikaṅ vyavahāranya, apan gavayakənanira pagəh iiṁ kāryanikaṅ-nikā yogya pagəhakənanira. yadā svayaṁ na kuryāt tu nr̥patiḥ kāryadarśanam | tadā niyuñjyād vidvāṁsaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ kāryadarśane || MDhŚ 8.009 kunaṅ saṅ prabhu hayva sira gumavayakəngumavayan ikaṅ kāryāmivakṣakaryavivaksa guṇadoṣa, akona ta sira ririṁ saṅ brāhmaṇaprabrahmaṇna vihikan maṅajiaṅaji, kumavruhana yogyāyogyayogya-Cf. §2 iṅət-iṅətənirātah yogyāyogyani kāryanikaṅ mavyavahāra kālih.nikaṅ vvaṅ mavyavahāra kālih. aṣṭādaśapadābhijñaṁ prāḍvivāketi saṁjñitam | ānvīkṣikyāṁ ca kuśalaṁ śrutismr̥tiparāyaṇam || This stanza is absent from the constituted text in , though it is referenced in his app. crit. for ms. Ox2 after 8.9. Mandlik (p. 877) and Jha include the stanza at the beginning of Medhātithi’s comment on 8.9; in his notes, Jha (v. 9, p. 490) cites citations of this verse in medieval scholastic works. In contrast with the cases in Div. XX and YY, van Naerssen () did not notice that the Old Javanese text here implies the presence of this stanza because the Sanskrit original is not quoted. saṅ brāhmaṇa saṅ vruh riṅ aṣṭādaśavyavahāra, sira tasiranata saṅ sinaṅguh prāgvivākapragivaka, saṅ vruh riṅ aji tarka, vruhtarkkavruhatankavruhaNote the absence of punctuation coupled with the use of an irrealis form in . riṅ śrutismvati veda. vivāde pr̥cchati praśnaṁ pratipraśnaṁ tathaiva ca | priyapūrvaṁ prāg vadati prāḍvivākas tataḥ smr̥taḥ || This stanza is present neither in the constituted text of , nor in its app. crit., but is known to have occurred in the Br̥haspatismr̥ti, a text often cited by medieval Indian dharmaśāstra authors. The Old Javanese paraphrase suggests that its author knew the Sanskrit stanza with a reading vicāre for vivāde. kunaṅ ikaṅ takvan iṅtantraniṁtankvaniṅ (taṅgvaniṅ?)Questioning is the topic of the stanza, which explains why a prāḍvivāka/prāgvivāka is so-named. Retaining the word takvan here from the slightly corrupt reading of , we reject the readings matakvan () and patakvan () in the next sentence. Our author uses takvan again at the beginning of div 28. vicāra, gavayakəna rumuhun, sādhana saṅ prāgvivāka irikaṅmatakvan irikaṁpatakvan ikaṁ mavyavahāra kālih, vivekanira ta sahurnya vəkasan, mataṅyanmataṅhyanmataṅya ta prāgvivākapragivaka pva ṅaranira. so ’sya kāryāṇi saṁpaśyet sabhyair eva tribhir vr̥taḥ | sabhām eva praviśyāgryām āsīnaḥ sthita eva vā || MDhŚ 8.010 aṅiṅət-iṅəta tahaṅiṅətiṅəttha saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, i kāryanikaṅhinaryyanikaṁiṁ karyanikaṁ mavyavahāra kālih, arovaṅa ta sira vvaṅ yogya riṅ sabhāsana: tigaṅ viji, tumamaajumamaha: ta sirāluṅguhāpagəhasira:luṅguḥhapagəhasiraluṅguḥhapagəhasiraluṅguhapagəhaIt would also be possible to interpet the manuscript evidence as supporting sirāluṅguh apagəha, with irrealis suffix only on the second form. riṅ sabhā. yasmin deśe niṣīdanti viprā vedavidas trayaḥ | rājñaś ca prakr̥to vidvān brāhmaṇas tāṁ sabhāṁ viduḥ || MDhŚ 8.011 saṅ brāhmaṇa tigaṅ sikisasiki, paḍa vruh maṅaji, hana brāhmaṇahana ta brahmana sasiki prajñānpradña vidagdha, vinidhi muṅgva riṅ deśa saṅ prabhu, ikaṅ deśa papupulanira, yeka deśa sabhā ṅaranya de saṅ paṇḍitayeka de saṁ paṇḍita. na sā sabhā yatra na santi vr̥ddhā vr̥ddhā na te ye na vadanti dharmam | nāsau dharmo yatra na satyam asti na tat satyaṁ yac chalenānuviddham || sameAs="#NarSm mā. 3.17/NMS vya. 80 MDhŚ 8.12: dharmo viddhas tv adharmeṇa sabhāṁ yatropatiṣṭhate | śalyaṁ cāsya na kr̥ntanti viddhās tatra sabhāsadaḥ || ikaṅ sabhāśana:, yan tan hana saṅ vr̥ddhah tan sabhā ṅaranya, saṅ vr̥ddhah yan tan vruh iṅriṅ dharma, tan vr̥ddhah ṅaranira,saṅ vr̥ddhah ... tan vr̥ddhaḥ ṅaranira, saṅ vruh iṅriṅ dharma yan tan agəgvanaAll mss. present an irrealis here. Emend agəgvan? kasatyankajatyan·, tan dharma ṅaranika, kunaṅ yan tan ginavayakəngina§va:yan ikaṅ dharma riṅ sabhā, sukət paṅəməh ṅaranika sahaneṅsaṁ haneṁ sabhā, mapanmavan ikaṅ deśa kinahananiṅ dharma, tan kavoraniṅkavoranaṅ adharmi, yeka sabhā ṅaranya. sabhā vā na praveṣṭavyā vaktavyaṁ vā samañjasam | abruvan vibruvan vāpi naro bhavati kilbiṣī || MDhŚ 8.013 kunaṅ ikaṅ vvaṅ aṅujarakən prāya yukti, salah denya vəkasan, makveh ujarnya, vvaṅ katon doṣanyaḍeṣanya, ikatika ta kabeh tan yogya tumamaa riṅ sabhā. yatra dharmo hy adharmeṇa satyaṁ yatrānr̥tena ca | hanyate prekṣamāṇānāṁ hatās tatra sabhāsadaḥ || MDhŚ 8.014 mataṅyan maṅkana, dharmanika saṅ uniṅa riṅ dharma, hilaṅ ika deniṅ adharma riṅ sabhā, kasatyanirakasaktyanira maṅkanātah hilaṅ ikāhilaṁnika: deniṅ adva riṅ sabhā, yapvan alah juga dharma deniṅ adharma, alah juga satya deniṅ adva, paḍa hanapadaha pva ya riṅ sabhā, patimbunaniṅpatambunaniṁ kuṇapa ṅaraniṅ sabhā yan maṅkana. dharma eva hato hanti dharmo rakṣati rakṣitaḥ | tasmād dharmo na hantavyo mā no dharmo hato ’vadhīt || MDhŚ 8.015 kunaṅ yan iṅilaṅakən saṅ hyaṅ dharma, maləs juga sira maṅilaṅakən, yan rinakṣa saṅ hyaṅ dharma, maləs juga sira maṅrakṣamarakṣa, mataṅyanmataṅhyan·mataṅhya maṅkana, hayvāṅilaṅakən dharma, liṅniṅ vvaṅ, tan paṅilaṅakən pva kita dharma, tan paṅilaṅakən sira iri ya, maṅkanamaṅka liṅ .All mss. have atəhər (spelled at:hər) directly following liṅ. This seems grammatically impossible, as maṅkana liṅ is always used in a possessive construction immediately followed by a designation of the speaker. We can only guess that words like bhaṭāra manu have been omitted. atəhər pramāṇastavapraṇama:stavapr̥ṇattama:stava:pranatomastava. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. apanlapanhapan tan hana ləviha sakeṅ dharma, sira pinakapramāṇaniṅpinakapra:maṇan riṁpinakapr̥maṇan riṅ loka, siraloka:, ta pinakasvarga saṅ magavesamagave hayu, sira pinakakaləpasan saṅ paṇḍita, tan maṅkana ikaṅ vvaṅ adharma, tan hana gamāntyanyagamantyanya maṅkanāta saṅka pisana tuvi. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. mapan ikaṅ loka kabeh, dharma umagəhakənumagəgakən ika, kinapagəhakən pva sira de saṅseṁ yatna, maləs sira magəhakən, apan tan pāpa ikaṅhika loka maṅkana maṅkana:, ikaṅ tan aṅilaṅakən dharma. vr̥ṣo hi bhagavān dharmas tasya yaḥ kurute tv alam | vr̥ṣalaṁ taṁ vidur devās tasmād dharmaṁ na lopayet || MDhŚ 8.016 mataṅyanmataṅnyanmataṅhyan maṅkana, ləmbu rūpa bhaṭārabha:va:ra dharma, hana pva vvaṅvvavvata vaṁ tan agave dharma, yeka pāpa liṅniṅ deva, maṅkana pva ya, hayva kita maṅilaṅakən dharma. eka eva suhr̥d dharmo nidhāne ’py anuyāti yaḥ | śarīreṇa samaṁ nāśaṁ sarvam anyad dhi gacchati || MDhŚ 8.017 saṅsa tumut ri kālaniṅ patimati sira ta bhaṭāra dharma, mitra tan pakarva pva, parəṅ ilaṅ mvaṅ śarīra, mvaṅ dharma, kunaṅ ikaṅ dravya len sakerika, salah paran ika. pādo ’dharmasya kartāraṁ pādaḥ sākṣiṇam r̥cchati | pādaḥ sabhāsadaḥ sarvān pādo rājānam r̥cchati || MDhŚ 8.018 saṅ hyaṅ dharma saparapatansaparaṭa:pantan tinəmuniṅ mavyavahāra yan satya, maṅkana ikaṅ sākṣi yan satya, anəmu saparapatanirasaparaparatanirasaṁ parapata sira: saṅ hyaṅsaṁṅyaṁ dharma, maṅkana saṅ mavivakṣa kabeh, yan satya anəmu saparapatanira saṅ hyaṅ dharmātah, saṅ prabhu anəmu saparapatanirātah, agəṅ juga phalaniṅ kasatyan ginavayakənka:satyaniṁ ginavya:kən·. rājā bhavaty anenās tu mucyante ca sabhāsadaḥ | eno gacchati kartāraṁ nindārho yatra nindyate || MDhŚ 8.019 saṅ prabhu tan kahanan sira riṅri pāpa, saṅ mavivakṣa kabeh luput sira riṅ pāpa, ikaṅ mavyavahāra salah pakṣanya juga təmpuhanya, nininda siṅsi saṅkananya, kahava tkeṅkahavat·tkeṁkahava təke deśa kahananya. jātimātropajīvī vā kāmaṁ syād brāhmaṇabruvaḥ | dharmapravaktā nr̥pater na tu śūdraḥ kathaṁ cana || MDhŚ 8.20: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. yasya śūdras tu kurute rājño dharmavivecanam | tasya sīdati tad rāṣṭraṁ paṅke gaur iva paśyataḥ || MDhŚ 8.021 maṅkana saṅ prabhu, yan śūdra prāgvivākanirapr̥gvivakanirapragivaksira, kaḍatvanira durbalaḍūrbbala:ḍūrgghala kṣaya, kadi ləmbu kapətək riṅri latək ajro. kadi ləmbu kapətək riṅ latək ajro Cf. Bhīṣmaparva 124.19: kadi ləmbu kapətək iṅ latək. yad rāṣṭraṁ śūdrabhūyiṣṭhaṁ nāstikākrāntam advijam | vinaśyaty āśu tat kr̥tsnaṁ durbhikṣavyādhipīḍitam || MDhŚ 8.022 ikaṅ rājya yan kakehaniṅiṁ kakehaniṁ śūdra, akveh vvaṅhakeḥ vaṁ manayākən deva iriya, tan pabrāhmaṇa ikaṅ rājya maṅkana, śīghra hilaṅ deniṅ lapāden alapa vyādhi bhaya kaḍatvanira. The Sanskrit stanza corresponding to the following prose has not been idenfied with certainty. We note the following passages expressing partly similar ideas: YDh 1.360 = Br̥hSm 1.1.106: vyavahārān svayaṁ paśyet sabhyaiḥ parivr̥to ’nvaham || KātySm 71cd–72ab: sarvaśāstrapravīṇāś ca sabhyāḥ kāryā dvijottamāḥ || nyāyaśāstram atikramya sabhyair yatra viniścitam | Br̥hSm 1.1.62: sādhukarmakriyāyuktāḥ satyadharmaparāyaṇāḥ | akrodhalobhāḥ śāstrajñāḥ sabhyāḥ kāryā mahībhujā || Br̥hSm 1.1.57: pratiṣṭhitāpratiṣṭhā ca mudritā śāsitā tathā | caturvidhā sabhā proktā sabhyāś caiva tathāvidhāḥ || maṅkana pva ya, maṅutusa ta sirāmivakṣaasira vivaksaha*, vvaṅ vruh iṅ āgama, śīghra maṅucapa yan tinakvanan, saṅ makveh kavruhnirakavruḥnya śruti vedadeva, paḍaməlakəna vataṅan pāt, ikaṅ vetan *pamivakṣanapavivaksana, sakveh saṅ umuṅguhhikaṁ muṅguḥ irika, sira tahirika ta sira paḍa umiṅət-iṅəta sarasaniṅ vyavahāra. dharmāsanam adhiṣṭhāya saṁvītāṅgaḥ samāhitaḥ | praṇamya lokapālebhyaḥ kāryadarśanam ārabhet || MDhŚ 8.023 maṅkanānakənamaṅkanaknamaṅkana:knamaṅkana sajiniṅ vataṅan, apuy riṅ payajñanvayajña:n·payadñan, kumbha mesya bañu, halalaṅ, sarvavīja, maṇik curiga muṅgva riṅ səṇḍi. tumama pva saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka riṅ sabhā, mavəḍihana, asalimputamavḍihana, saliputamavḍihana:, salimputa, maṅañjalia riṅ caturlokapāla, luməkasa ta sira maṅiṅət-iṅəta kāryanikaṅ mavyavahāra kālih. arthānarthāv ubhau buddhvā dharmādharmau ca kevalau | varṇakrameṇa sarvāṇi paśyet kāryāṇi kāryiṇām || MDhŚ 8.025 kavruhananira taṅkaṅ ujar adon lavan tan padon, mvaṅ ikaṅmvahaṁ§kaṁ tuhu lavan adva, nahan ta kāryanikaṅ mavyavahāra kālih, iniṅət-iṅətənira, tumutana kramaniṅ varṇanikaṅ mavyavahāra. bāhyair vibhāvayel liṅgair bhāvam antargataṁ nr̥ṇām | svaravarṇeṅgitākāraiś cakṣuṣā ceṣṭitena ca || MDhŚ 8.025 adharmahaḍarmma:-da:rmma:-buddhinikaṅ mavyavahāra, iṅətakənanyaIṅətakənya tuvi, kavruhanatvinya kavruhana kavruhana, de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, vāhyaliṅgaiḥvaya:liṅgevahyaliṅge, makanimittamakadimitta *paṅanumānapaṅanumaha katon, śabdanya kasalahan, kavənəsan, eṅashaṅa:seṅgas tan asiga rira vəkasan, mulatmalat· muliṅā, salahsahalah alaṅə̄aṅə:alaṅo. ākārair iṅgitair gatyā ceṣṭayā bhāṣitena ca | netravaktravikāraiś ca gr̥hyate ’ntargataṁ manaḥ || MDhŚ 8.026 takvan ikaṅ manah, alit pinakabuṅkahiṅ buddhi, yadyapiyapi inət-ətakənhinəhəttakəninəhətakən ya denikaṅ avyavahāra, yan adharma, kavruhana ika de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, makanimittamukanimittamakanimita vāhyaliṅgavayaliṅga:. ākāraiḥAkareḥ, iṅgitaiḥIṅgitaḥiṅgita, lakunya, ulahnya, śabdanya, vikāraniṅ ulatnya, vənəsniṅ mukhanya. iti dharmacarita-caritta-ca:ritta,.
Protection of Faithful Women bāladāyādikaṁ rikthaṁ tāvad rājānupālayet | yāvat sa syāt samāvr̥tto yāvad vātītaśaiśavaḥ || MDhŚ 8.027 kunaṅ dravya kaliliraniṅ-ni rare uvuh-uvuhtuvuhuvuḥ, kəmitən kəkəsana saṅ prabhu, ikaṅ dravya, yan apaapan maṅkana, yāvat sa syātyavatna:syat·yavatnasyat·,yavatsyat samāvr̥ttosamavr̥to, yan huvusvus maṅaji, yanya tapvan vənaṅ rumakṣa dravyanya, kunaṅ yan huvusvus mulih sakiṅriṁ sakiṁ gurunya, vənaṅ rumakṣa dravyanya, vehakəna ikaṅ dravya iriya. vaśāputrāsu caivaṁ syād rakṣaṇaṁ niṣkulāsu ca | pativratāsu ca strīṣu vidhavāsv āturāsu ca || MDhŚ 8.028 strī valva-valvan mānak rareraray rakṣanənrakṣanan ika de saṅ prabhu, strī valuvalvavalva:vala tan pabapebupabavebupagavepebhū, strī valuvulu vyādhi, *makapaṅguhanmakapaṅgvanmakapaṅgavanThe same form is found also in . We do not see any other solution than to ignore the ma- prefix. Emend sakapaṅgihan? satyanyapatyanya riṅ jalunya, ika ta katiga rakṣanən de saṅ prabhu, sira aṅilaṅakəna yan hana vvaṅ avamānaavvaṁṅamana iriya, mataṅnyanmataṅhyanmataṅyan maṅkana, ikaṅIkaIka: kasatyan haneriya, pāvak bhaṭāra dharma katvaṅananirakatatvaṅarananirakatvaṅanira, kunaṅ yan tanyan satya ikaṅkaṁ strī, hayvatayva saṅ prabhu parabyāpāra irikā kabeh. jīvantīnāṁ tu tāsāṁ ye tad dhareyuḥ svabāndhavāḥ | tāñ chiṣyāc cauradaṇḍena dhārmikaḥ pr̥thivīpatiḥ || MDhŚ 8.029 yapvan hana kadaṅkaṇḍaṁ-nikaṅ strī valu satya səḍaṅnyan ahurip, umalapa dravyanya, daṇḍan ikaṅḍaṇda Ikaṁṅḍaṇḍa hikaṁṅReconsider this emendation: it seems that ḍaṇḍa in this text might actually be capable of meaning daṇḍan. aṅalapalap de saṅ prabhu, sadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ daṇḍaanyaḍaṇḍanyaThe parallel in §34 suggests that we should read an irrealis form here.. iti strīsatyasaṅrakṣaṇastrisatyasara:kṣaṇa:strisatya:ra:kṣaṇastridyasaṅraksana.
Account of Established Norms pranaṣṭasvāmikaṁ rikthaṁ rājā tryabdaṁ nidhāpayet | arvāk tryabdād dharet svāmī pareṇa nr̥patir haret || MDhŚ 8.030 kunaṅ ikaṅ dravya tan hana saṅ madravya, kəkəsana de saṅ prabhu ikaṅ dravya maṅkana, təluṅ tahun lavasanyalavasnya, yapvan təkatkiṁ ikaṅtikaṁ madravya, aminta i sira, vehakəna ikaṅ dravya de saṅ prabhu, yapvan alivat sakeṅsakiṁ tigaṅ tahun, alapən ikaṅtikatikaṁ dravya de saṅ prabhu. mamedam iti yo brūyāt so ’nuyojyo yathāvidhi | saṁvādya rūpasaṁkhyādīn svāmī tad dravyam arhati || MDhŚ 8.031 dravyaṅku iki liṅnya, saṅliṁnyansaṁ maṅaku dravyamaṅakuvadr̥vya, ika taṅIka:kaṁIkaṁThe construction ika taṅ maṅkana is also found in §61. maṅkana, takvanana ya irikaṅ dravya inakunya, vruh pva ye rūpanya siṅgih ika dravyanya, vehakəna iriya. avedayan pranaṣṭasya deśaṁ kālaṁ ca tattvataḥ | varṇaṁ rūpaṁ pramāṇaṁ ca tatsamaṁ daṇḍam arhati || MDhŚ 8.032 hana tan avruhtatan vruḥ ri kahilaṅaniṅrikaṁ hilaṅaniṁri kahilaṅani dravyanya, kālanya, nimittanya hilaṅ, varṇanya, rūpanya, kvehnya, kapva tikahika: tan hana kinavruhanyakavruhanya, kevalyasaṁ maṅaku dravya jugadr̥vya, Ikamaṅkana:, juga:drəvya suka jugaThe string cancelled in was initially written due to eye-skip from the preceding paragraph. ya, ika ta vvaṅika ta vaṁ ika ta vaṁ maṅkana, yogya daṇḍan ikaḍaṇḍa Ika:ḍaṇḍahika:The same hesitation applies to our emendation here as in our note to the same emendation made in §31., samūlyasaṅgulya-nikaṅ dravya inakunya daṇḍaanya. ādadītātha ṣaḍbhāgaṁ pranaṣṭādhigatān nr̥paḥ | daśamaṁ dvādaśaṁ vāpi satāṁ dharmam anusmaran || MDhŚ 8.033 kunaṅ yan təpət paṅakunya, vruh pve rūpanya, ikaṅIka dravya inakunya, vehakəna ikaṅIkahika: dravya iriya, *aṅśanana *sapanəmaniṅ dravyanya de saṅ prabhu, *sapapuluhanya kunaṅ, *paṅaṅśanira, rumakṣa dharmaniraḍarmma sira:ṅ saṅ prabhu yan maṅkana. pranaṣṭādhigataṁ dravyaṁ tiṣṭhed yuktair adhiṣṭhitam | yāṁs tatra caurān gr̥hṇīyāt tān rājebhena ghātayet || MDhŚ 8.034 kunaṅ ikaṅ dravya, kinonakən saṅ prabhu kəkəsana deniṅ vadvā parcayanira, alapənyahapapənya ta ya, mapamapan daṇḍanikacaṇḍanika: de saṅ prabhu, yan maṅkana, sikəpənsikəpəpən sabhākənasabha:kuknasabhakakna, corah ṅaranya, ambahakənanambahakəna riṅ liman daṇḍaanya. mamāyam iti yo brūyān nidhiṁ satyena mānavaḥ | tasyādadīta ṣaḍbhāgaṁ rājā dvādaśam eva vā || MDhŚ 8.035 kunaṅ ikaṅ dravya alavas pinəṇḍəm, dravyaṅkudrəvyaku iki liṅnya, pan tuhu dravyanya, tantatan kinəmitkənəmit saṅ prabhu ika, yadyapin maṅkana, maṅkana de saṅ prabhu, sapanəmanikaṅsapanmunikaṁsapanəmanika dravya, *sapararva-vəlasanya kunəṅ alapən anya. anr̥taṁ tu vadan daṇḍyaḥ svavittasyāṁśam aṣṭamam | tasyaiva vā nidhānasya saṁkhyayālpīyasīṁ kalām || MDhŚ 8.036 kunaṅ yan mithyamiṭyavivyamidya ya, daṇḍan, i savilaṅnikaṅ dravya, ləvihana ta sapavvalunyasapavalunyasaṁpavalunya, ləvihanaL̥viha sapanəm-bəlasnyasapanəmbalanyasapənəmbəlasan kunaṅ. vidvāṁs tu brāhmaṇo dr̥ṣṭvā pūrvopanihitaṁ nidhim | aśeṣato ’py ādadīta sarvasyādhipatir hi saḥ || MDhŚ 8.037 kunaṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa, yan panəmvapanəmvaṁ dravya pinəṇḍəmpinənəmpinənḍəmm alavasalavasa, alapənira kabeh, tan aṅśananaaṅśana:saṅkuna de saṅ prabhu, mataṅnyan maṅkana, saṅ brāhmaṇa viśeṣanviśeṣa:n· riṅ janmajadma kabeh. yaṁ tu paśyen nidhiṁ rājā purāṇaṁ nihitaṁ kṣitau | tasmād dvijebhyo dattvārdham ardhaṁ kośe praveśayet || MDhŚ 8.038 saṅ prabhu kunaṅ yan panəmvamanəmva dravya pinəṇḍəm alavas, avehataveha sira satəṅahnikaṅ dravya tinəmu denira i saṅ brāhmaṇa, ikaṅ satəṅah alapənira. nidhīnāṁ hi purāṇānāṁ dhātūnām eva ca kṣitau | ardhabhāg rakṣaṇād rājā bhūmer adhipatir hi saḥ || MDhŚ 8.039 mataṅyan maṅkanamataṅhyankunaṁ mataṅyan inalapnira sapanəmunikaṅ vvaṅ manəmu parvaparuha:, kinarvanira lavan saṅsaṁ saṁ brāhmaṇa, phalanirān paṅrakṣaṅ-nira para:kṣaṁ-nira:parakṣaṁ-nira paṅraksa rāt, apan svāminiṅ pr̥thivī tattvanira.tatvanira. iti pahuracarita. inserts an extra colophon. Cf. the case of paṇacarita. dātavyaṁ sarvavarṇebhyo rājñā caurair hr̥taṁ dhanam | rājā tad upayuñjānaś caurasyāpnoti kilbiṣam || MDhŚ 8.040 kunaṅ ikaṅ dravya kālap deniṅ maliṅ, vehakəna irikaṅ madravya, i salviranikaṅ-nika madravya, yanyen kapaṅgihakapaṅgya:kapaṅgva:Or should we normalize kapaṅguha? See kapaṅguh below. It seems that the spelling with u predominates in this text. de saṅ prabhu ikaṅ dravya, kunaṅ yan inalap de saṅ prabhu ikaṅ dravya, sapāpaniṅ maliṅ kapaṅguh denira. jātijānapadān dharmān śreṇīdharmāṁś ca dharmavit | samīkṣya kuladharmāṁś ca svadharmaṁ pratipādayet || MDhŚ 8.041 ulah kinapagəhakən iṅnapagəhakniṅkinapagəhakəna janmajadma, mvaṅ kinapagəhakən iṅkapagəhakniṅ thānitanitaniṁ janapada, kinapagəhakən iṅ baṇyāgabha:nyagana:nyaga:banyaga kunəṅkuni, kinapagəhakən iṅ kavatəkanya kunaṅ, ikakavatəkanya, kunaṁ Ikakavatəkanya kunaṁ hika ta kabeh kapagəhakəna de saṅ prabhu, yanyaOr would yar i be syntactially permissible here, and allow the same translation? Or can ika ta kabeh kapagəhakəna de saṅ prabhu ya ri svadharma stand as equivalent to ika ta kabeh kapagəhakəna ya de saṅ prabhu ri svadharma? ri svadharmanya, rumakṣa ri svadharmanira yan maṅkana. svāni karmāṇi kurvāṇā dūre santo ’pi mānavāḥ | priyā bhavanti lokasya sve sve karmaṇy avasthitāḥ || MDhŚ 8.042 yadyapi adoh puṇḍuhnyapuṇḍaḥnya ikaṅ vvaṅ sādhu, ginavayakənyagavayakənya juga svakarmanya, yatna juga ri kajanmanyakajadmanya, kapva ta ya, apagəh ririṁ svadharmanya sovaṅ-sovaṅ, rakṣan ika de saṅ prabhu, tan hana varṇasaṅkaravarṇnasaṅhara-parnasaṅara-nikaṅ rāt. notpādayet svayaṁ kāryaṁ rājā nāpy asya pūruṣaḥ | na ca prāpitam anyena grasetārthaṁ kathaṁ cana || MDhŚ 8.043 hayva saṅ prabhu prihavak yanyatan paməgatakəna vyavahāra, prāgvivākapvagvivaka-pvagivaka-nira maṅkanātah, tan prihavaka, tan paṅapatan paṅamatatan paṅapa patatan paṅapa maṅajipaṅa:jivvaṁṅaji yan tan paviveka, saṅka pisana tuvi. yathā nayaty asr̥kpātair mr̥gasya mr̥gayuḥ padam | nayet tathānumānena dharmasya nr̥patiḥ padam || MDhŚ 8.044 kady aṅganikaṅ tuhatva buru, tumut ikaṅ buron kəna panah denya, titisniṅ rahnya paṅavruhanya riṅ paranya, maṅkanāta saṅ prabhu, kavruhananira tādva-tuhunikaṅ kumavruhanira tadva:tuhunikaṁ kumavruhanira: tanḍya:tuhunikaṁ kumavruhanira advatuhunikaṅ Our emendation to kavruhananira here is made in conjunction with our choices of reading in the next section, and in §56. mavyavahāra kālih, makanimitta *paṅanumāna vāhyaliṅgādivvahyaliṅga:ḍḍitahyalaṅgadi. satyam arthaṁ ca saṁpaśyed ātmānam atha sākṣiṇaḥ | deśaṁ kālaṁ ca rūpaṁ ca vyavahāravidhau sthitaḥ || MDhŚ 8.045 kavruhanakavruhanika saṅ prāgvivāka tuhuniṅ vyavahāra, buddhiniṅ mavyavahāraThe reading in may be compared with the string found in §27., sākṣinya, deśanya, kālanya, rūpanya, kapva kavruhananirakavruhana: sira, mapagəhamakapagəha ta sira, ri kavidhyaniṅ vyavahāra. sadbhir ācaritaṁ yat syād dhārmikaiś ca dvijātibhiḥ | tad deśakulajātīnām aviruddhaṁ prakalpayet || MDhŚ 8.046 ikaṅ maryāda huvusvuḥvus ginavayakənginavayakna saṅ paṇḍita, dhārmikaḍarmmikaṁdharmikaṁ brāhmaṇa, gavayakəna tan paviruddha ya lavan deśa-kula-jāti-mārga-vargga-mamarga de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka. iti maryādacarita.
Account of (Non-payment of) Debt adhamarṇārthasiddhyartham uttamarṇena coditaḥ | dāpayed dhanikasyārtham adhamarṇād vibhāvitam || MDhŚ 8.047 kunaṅ ikaṅ vvaṅ mahutaṅ, tagihən kədvakənakḍva:kna denikaṅdekaṅ mapihutaṅ, śuddhānya hutaṅnya ri saṅ pradhanapra:ḍa:napr̥daṇapradanaOJED records only pr̥dana (one occurrence each in Koravāśrama and Kuṭāra-Mānava), but the source of this word is evidently Sanskrit pradhana., prakāśakənanya tuvi, *huvusaniṅhusaniṁ hutaṅnya. yair yair upāyair arthaṁ svaṁ prāpnuyād uttamarṇikaḥ | tair tair upāyaiḥ saṁgr̥hya dāpayed adhamarṇikam || MDhŚ 8.048 kunaṅ ikaṅ mapihutaṅ, upāyanya kapva kāraṇaniṅ pihutaṅnyanpahutaṁnya:pyutaṅnya mijila, tan vehənveha: maṅgəhmaṅga atuṅgu, kāraṇanyan panahuranaṅpanahuraniṁpanaturraniṁOur emendation is supported by Kuṭāra-Mānava §7 kaṅ amateni amanahurana hutaṅe kaṅ den-pateni ikā and §77 anake amanahurana hutaṅe kaṅ apəpəgatan ikā. hutaṅnya. dharmeṇa vyavahāreṇa chalenācaritena ca | prayuktaṁ sādhayed arthaṁ pañcamena balena ca || MDhŚ 8.049 tagihən, asih-asihəna:sira:sihasihən·, konən manahura, kapiṅro, taṅtaṅəntaṁtaṅənataṁtaṅəna: mavyavahāra, kapiṅtiga, adānahadanahadana: sisilihan, kapiṅpat, dānana tuṅgaldinana, tuṅgul·dinana,dinana, tuṅgun, maṅkana upāyaniṁ sumādhya pihutaṅnyapahutaṁnyapyutaṅnya mijila, tanyatan kavənaṅ pva ya ikaṅ mahutaṅ deniṅ upāya pat, lakvakəna ta kapiṅlimaniṅ upāya, valātkāranmalantaran, irən huluna. Kuṭāra-Mānava 107: riṅ voṅ ahutaṅ tan harəp anahura, katəmu deniṅ apihutaṅ, tagihən upasamanən iṅ manis iṅ ujar təmbehan, kapiṅro upayanən vətuvaniṅ hutaṅ, kapiṅtlu taṅtaṅen aucapan, kapiṅpat bañcananən sisilihana, kapiṅlima iridakna konən anuṅgonana saguṅiṅ pisis. yaḥ svayaṁ sādhayed artham uttamarṇo ’dhamarṇikāt | na sa rājñābhiyoktavyaḥ svakaṁ saṁsādhayan dhanam || MDhŚ 8.050 ikaṅ mapihutaṅmavihutaṁmapyutaṁ, sumādhya pihutaṅnya mijilaumijila, saṅkerikaṅ mahutaṅ, tatantata:t uhutana de saṅ prabhu, apan tumagihakəntugihakən māsnya ika, tunānyāya gatinya, kunaṅ ikaṅ ahutaṅ, ulih anyāya gatinya. arthe ’pavyayamānaṁ tu karaṇena vibhāvitam | dāpayed dhanikasyārthaṁ daṇḍaleśaṁ ca śaktitaḥ || MDhŚ 8.051 kunaṅ ikaṅ *anaṅguh mamuhaka ririṁ hutaṅnya, tan katon riṅ *pañjipañjiṁ ikaṅ puhakakənanyapuha:knanyapuhaknanya, sahurənya ikaṅ hutaṅ sakesisakeṁsisakiṁsisakesaA second hand has crossed out the anusvāra in . riṅ pañji saṅ pradhanapraḍa:napr̥dana:pradana, daṇḍa ta ya mātra sakavənaṅnyasakənavənaṅnya. r̥ṇe deye pratijñāte pañcakaṁ śatam arhati | apahnave tu dviguṇaṁ tan manor anuśāsanam || MDhŚ 8.139: This stanza is found in Olivelle's constituted text not after stanza 51 but only as stanza 139. See Olivelle's comment on p. 956. ikaṅ hutaṅ sinamayakənsinamahakən, sahurən ya denikaṅ ahutaṅ, ri təkatəkan samayayasmaya: pva tan sinahuranyasinahuran utaṅnya, yogya daṇḍan ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, daṇḍa limaṅpañcasaṭa paṇa, tumutanatumuttanaṁtumutkanaṁtumuttaṁ satus paṇa, ku, 1, mā, 5mā, 10, mā, 2, yan samaṅkana hutaṅniṅ mithyanyamiṭyanyamidyanyamityanya, kunaṅ yanyana paṅas tan pasamayāmasamaya-nahura liṅnya, katəpətankatəpatan deniṅ sākṣi mvaṅ tulis, ləpihakəna ikaṅ pañcapañcasaṭa paṇa, ku, 2ku, 2, śu, I, ma, 2ku, ṅu, riṅ satus *paṅḍaṇḍeriyapaṅande, maṅkana śāsanaśaṇasa bhaṭāra manu. ya tapva ahutaṅ, pinet kinuṅkuṅ ta ya de pradhana, sajatyahirahiri, məməndət kunaṅ, tan ambava Utənaradi, lvaṅ pivakaṅ nadya niṣṭa, pradhana tan sama ḍaṇḍa, ləbur pirak pradhana, təhər huculana kaṅ ahutaṅ. salviriṅ niṣṭa tiniban hastacapala vākpāruṣya, tan katutkanut iṅ ubhaya, ləbur pirak kaṅpira:kaṁ pradhana, bantən iṅ pitara, ṅa. mvah jajaka, hinuṅgah iṅhinuṅgeṁ rabiniṅ voṅ, makādy oraraṅaniṅ len, yathāyadṭa pinisah voṅ jalir ṅaran, jajaka pinikṣeṅ lokika, kneṅ lokika: sipat, ya ta lvir, 40000, tuvi pinaten kavnaṅ, ndah tan kneṅ lokika:, sajatya nir sipat. voṅ apadva sinambat, hana len, tinurunakna śinabda, de upatya, sakvehiṅ sinambat buron hatavan brana, tinampak rah de haburva vnaṅ. kunəṅ pvekaṅ tan tinuron, ḍaṇḍa kaṅ sinambat vrat iṅ apadu. ya tapva ahutaṅ, ..., ḍaṇḍa kaṅ sinambat vrat iṅ apadu. These paragraphs are absent in witnesses and seem extraneous to our text. apahnave ’dhamarṇasya dehīty uktasya saṁsadi | abhiyoktā diśed deśaṁ karaṇaṁ vānyad uddiśet || MDhŚ 8.052 kunaṅ yan paṅas tikaṅ ahutaṅ, tuduhakəna deśa kahanankahinan yan pahutaṅahutaṁ, pintonanamintonana pañji mvaṅ sākṣi. yatra na syāt kr̥taṁ pattraṁ karaṇaṁ ca na vidyate | na copalambhaḥ pūrvoktas tatra daivī kriyā bhavet || Olivelle’s ms. La1 interpolates this stanza after 8.52; Mandlik records it in brackets after 8.51 (likewise KSS and Dave). Medhātithi cites it in his commentary on 8.51 as an illustrative quotation with the words “thus they say” (tathāhuḥ), and with the reading pūrvokto daivī tatra. yan tan hanatana patranikaṅ *ananagihanagiḥThe reduplicated form ananagih found twice in this section also occurs in §102., sādhananiṅ *ananagihhananagiḥananagiha tan hanātah, tan hana putra *kalāntarapuhakalantara, tan hanāmituturihanamityari samasatan hanataḥ, samāsatyaa juga ya, bhaṭārabharata kumavruhanākumavruha-dva-tuhunya. adeśaṁ yaś ca diśati nirdiśyāpahnute ca yaḥ | yaś cādharottarān arthān vigītān nāvabudhyate || MDhŚ 8.053 hanāpihutaṅ tumuduh ikaṅ deśa, pisaniṅuna deśanikaṅ mahutaṅ, hana ta deśa tinuduhtinuduḥ mvatinuduhnya pūrvaka, vəkasan kinasnya, hana tan vruh rita vruḥtan· vruḥ riṁ kveh-kəḍikniṅ pihutaṅnyakveḥkḍik hutaṁnya, mvaṅmvaḥ tan vruh pakənaniṅ piraknyanpirakniṅ *hinutaṅ. apadiśyāpadeśyaṁ ca punar yas tv apadhāvati | samyak praṇihitaṁ cārthaṁ pr̥ṣṭaḥ san nābhinandati || MDhŚ 8.054 hanāpihutaṅnahan pihutaṁ madalihan mariṅ deśa pisaniṅun parananya riṅ lāgilagiḥ, hana luṅhā riṅ təkaniṅ maṅucapanamaṅucapaṇna, tinakvanan de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka i sanmukhanya, mənəṅ tan sumahuriṣumavura:sumavura:, asaṁbhāṣye sākṣibhiś ca deśe saṁbhāṣate mithaḥ | nirucyamānaṁ praśnaṁ ca necched yaś cāpi niṣpatet || MDhŚ 8.055 hana ta luṅhā niṣkāraṇa, tumiṅgalakən paṅajinya, hana tatan hana kahyun yan huvusvuhus luməkas avyavahāra. brūhīty uktaś ca na brūyād uktaṁ ca na vibhāvayet | na ca pūrvāparaṁ vidyāt tasmād arthāt sa hīyate || MDhŚ 8.056 liṅ saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, huvushuhusvus tinakvanantinakvana:-mami, lavanta mavyavahāramavya:vara:mavya:varamamavyavahara, adya siṅgih karika ujarnya ri kita, mavaraha ta kita iri kami, maṅkana liṅ saṅsa prāgvivākapragragviva:kapragivaka, tatan sahur, hana tan eṅət ririṁ ujarnya tambeyantambaya:n·, hana tatan vruh ririṁ rumuhunrumun kārikariṁ, ika taikaṁ taṁika taṁ maṅkana kabeh, ya tikatekakita sorakənacorakəna vicāranya. jñātāraḥ santi mety uktvā diśety ukto diśen na yaḥ | dharmasthaḥ kāraṇair etair hīnaṁ tam iti nirdiśet || The third lemma suggest a difference transmission of the base text: diśety ukto diśen na cet. jñātāraḥjñataraḥjñatara, santi mety uktvāantaantaḥaktaḥ, hana ta vvaṅ makvehakveḥ sākṣinya, diśetidisetideseti, kinon ta ya mijilakəna sākṣinya, na cetna cetana cetaḥneceta, tatan vijilakən yavijilakəna, ika taṅ maṅkana, varahakəna yan sor pakṣanyayan pakṣanya soryan sopaksanya, makanimitta salahniṅ kira-kiranya, dharma saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka yan maṅkana. abhiyoktā na ced brūyād vadhyo daṇḍyaś ca dharmataḥ | na cet tripakṣāt prabrūyād dharmaṁ prati parājitaḥ || The paraphrase suggests that the received reading, instead of vadhyo, was bādhyo, baddhyo or bandhyo, the former two being among the variant readings recorded by Olivelle. The manuscripts for the paraphrase also seems to presuppose a reading trisākṣiṇam bruyāt (or the like) instead of tripakṣāt prabruyāt. But no such variant is reported in Olivelle’s edition. hana vvaṅ managih-nagih, tinakvanantinakvana: kāraṇaniṅkaraniṁ pihutaṅnyapahutaṁnyapyutaṅnya, tatan sumahur kapənətkapət·, sikəpənsikən·, yogya daṇḍan ikadanda ika, satinagihakənanyasatinagiḥnyaraśa:tinagiha:knanya ləpihakənaṅapihakəna. kunaṅ ikaṅ anagih tan paṅujarakənapahujaraknapahujar=raknaOr could the form paüjarakəna have been intended by the author?, tripakṣatrisakṣiAll mss. read tripakṣa in §93., ndyaṇḍyan· lvirnya, sākṣi, likhita, bhukti, yogya sorakəna vicāranya, de saṅ prāgvivāka.All witnesses indicate a strong punctuation after ləpihakəna. yo yāvan nihnuvītārthaṁ mithyā yāvati vā vadet | tau nr̥peṇa hy adharmajñau dāpyau taddviguṇaṁ damam || MDhŚ 8.059 hana vvaṅ aṅas yan pahutaṅyanapahutaṁ, hana vvaṅ managih riṅ tan pahutaṅtan papihutamririhanpahutaṁtan ahutaṁ, ikaṅ aṅasIkaṁṅkaṅas·hika:ṅka:ṅa§s· yan pahutaṅyanapahutaṁ, mvaṅ managih riṅ tan pahutaṅ, adharma ṅaranya, vruh yan salah ulahnya, aṅas yan pahutaṅhaṅas· yan patuhutaṁ, haṅas· yan pahutaṁ, mvaṅvvaṁvaṁ tan tuhv apihutaṅapyutaṁ, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, yogya daṇḍanḍaṇḍa kālih, savilaṅikaṅ hutaṅ inaṅasnyautaṅnya, kaṅ hinaṅashutaṁ haṅasnyautaṅ iṅasnya ləpihakəna, ya daṇḍanikaṅ aṅas hutaṅnya hutaṁ hutaṁnya hutaṁ sakuR̥nya: L̥piha ya, Ikaṁ yan· L̥piḥniṁ hutaṁnya , *pandaṇḍeriya satinagihakən ləpihakənasatinagiha:kənya L̥pihakna ya:satinagihakəna ləpihakəna ta ya, daṇḍanikaṅ anagih riṅ tan pahutaṅ. pr̥ṣṭo ’pavyayamānas tu kr̥tāvastho dhanaiṣiṇā | tryavaraiḥ sākṣibhir bhāvyo nr̥pabrāhmaṇasaṁnidhau || MDhŚ 8.060 kunaṅ yan tinagih ikaṅ ahutaṅ ikaṅ inagih vvaṁṅ avutaṁ yan anagiḥ hikaṁṅ ahutaṁ , apuhaka pva ya pintonakəna i saṅ brāhmaṇa, sākṣyakəna risakṣihakna I rva təlu. yādr̥śā dhanibhiḥ kāryā vyavahāreṣu sākṣiṇaḥ | tādr̥śān saṁpravakṣyāmi yathā vācyam r̥taṁ ca taiḥ || MDhŚ 8.061 sakvehnikaṅ sākṣipakṣi, hinanākəniṅhinanahakniṁhina:nayakniṁinanabakəniṁ pradhanapraḍaṇa:pr̥ḍaṇa: riṅ vyavahāra, salviriṅ ujar tuhu varahakənaujarakəna riṅ sākṣi, varahakənaṅkv i dlāha, maṅkana liṅnikaṅliṁṅikaṅliṅ iki pradhanapraḍaṇḍapr̥ḍaṇapradana. iti r̥ṇacarita-carittha.
Topic of Witnesses, etc. gr̥hiṇaḥ putriṇo maulāḥ kṣatraviṭśūdrayonayaḥ | arthyuktāḥ sākṣyam arhanti na ye ke cid anāpadi || MDhŚ 8.062 kunaṅ lviranikaṅ sākṣi, vvaṅ magr̥hapragr̥ha:pr̥gr̥ha:pragəha, vvaṅ akveh anaknya, maulāḥmolaḥhmolah apagəh riṅ tanitaniṁ, kṣatriya janmakṣatrya janmakṣatriya jadma:, vaiśya,veśya, śūdrayonisudrayonisudr̥yoniṁsudərayoni sudrayoni,, ika ta kabeh yogya sākṣya i tatkālaniṅ āpadgata. āptāḥ sarveṣu varṇeṣu kāryāḥ kāryeṣu sākṣiṇaḥ | sarvadharmavido ’lubdhā viparītāṁs tu varjayet || MDhŚ 8.063 saṅ vihikana riṅri caturvarṇa, vihikan iṅ ulah dharma, *makapaṅguhanamaka:paṅgvana:makapvaṅgvanaThe same form is found also in §30. tan lobha, gavayakəna sākṣigavayana: sakṣigaveyan saksi riṅ vyavahāra, kunaṅ yan balik riṅri polahnyapolyanya, tiṅgalakəna tan sākṣyasaksi ika. nārthasaṁbandhino nāptā na sahāyā na vairiṇaḥ | na dr̥ṣṭadoṣāḥ kartavyā na vyādhyārtā na dūṣitāḥ || MDhŚ 8.064 vvaṅ kapihutaṅan, mamihutaṅi kunaṅ, vvaṅ apuṅguṅ, rovaṅnya riṅ sarvakārya, vvaṅ mūlātukarmulattakar·mulat tukar, rovaṅnyarovanyaEmend vvaṅ ma-? cacadan, vvaṅ griṅan, vvaṅ hinalan sapolahnya, ika ta kabeh tan yogya sākṣya. na sākṣī nr̥patiḥ kāryo na kārukakuśīlavau | na śrotriyo na liṅgastho na saṅgebhyo vinirgataḥ || MDhŚ 8.065 saṅ prabhu tuvi, uṇḍahagi, menmen, brāhmaṇa vedapāraga, viku, viku niṣparigraha. nādhyadhīno na vaktavyo na dasyur na vikarmakr̥t | na vr̥ddho na śiśur naiko nāntyo na vikalendriyaḥ || MDhŚ 8.066 vvaṅ lanāṅuṅguh-uṅguhlana huṅguhuṅguḥlanaṁ huṅguḥhuṅguḥlanuṅgu-uṅgu, vvaṅ inucap iṅ halaiṅucap hala:hiṅucap haṅ alaitucap iṅ ala, maliṅ prakāśa, amaṇḍagiṇaamanduṅina, atuhavoṁṅatuha:tatuha: dahat, rareThe two words supplied here are assumed to have been omitted in transmission due to eye-skip. Their restoration is supported by two other occurrences of the pair atuha/rare in our text, in §74 and YY. dahatnahava, tuṅga-tuṅgaltuṅgaltuṅgal·, caṇḍāla, vutahutthahutta, tuli, ika ta kabeh tan yogya sākṣyasakṣi. nārto na matto nonmatto na kṣuttr̥ṣṇopapīḍitaḥ | na śramārto na kāmārto na kruddho nāpi taskaraḥ || MDhŚ 8.067 vvaṅ səḍaṅsḍəṁṅ alaraalira, vvaṅ səḍaṅsḍəṁṅ avuru, buddhinyāvərə̄budinyavəR̥buddhinyavuR̥budinya avro kunaṅ, edan, tan panəmu paṅanənya, alara deniṅ ṅelnyadeniṁhaṁhelnya:deniṅelnya, alara deniṅ rāganya, vvaṅ bvat pəṅiṅanpṅiṅan·paṅiṅan, tan akukuh śabdanyaa:kuku, bḍa:nyaakukuḥ sasabdanya, ika ta kabeh muvah tan yogya sākṣya. strīṇāṁ sākṣyaṁ striyaḥ kuryur dvijānāṁ sadr̥śā dvijāḥ | śūdrāś ca santaḥ śūdrāṇām antyānām antyayonayaḥ || MDhŚ 8.068 kunaṅ yan strī ikaṅIkaṁ histri mavyavahāramavyavara:, strī sākṣinyasaksyanya, yan dvija mavyavahāra,dvija dvija sākṣinirasa:kṣya dvija:dvija sakṣyanira, yan śūdra mavyavahārayan vika:ra sudra, śūdra sākṣinyasakṣyanirasaksinira, yan caṇḍāla mavyavahāracacaṇḍalacaṇḍala, caṇḍāla sākṣinyasakṣyanya.The readings of the three witnesses represent two recensions that cannot be reconciled with each other without doing violence to the one or the other. It is noticeable that the recension represented by and , which we follow here, is much more coherent than that represented by . By the principle of lectio difficilior potior, the latter should perhaps be preferred: its readings are less consistent, somewhat elliptical, and compressed, whereas the readings of the other recension could be interpreted as an expansion and systematization. On the other hand, the use of -nira in reference to the Śūdra must be a slip. anubhāvī tu yaḥ kaś cit kuryāt sākṣyaṁ vivādinām | antarveśmany araṇye vā śarīrasyaiva cātyaye || MDhŚ 8.069 salviranikaṅ vvaṅ, yan enakyan ena:k·nenak·The agreement between the uncorrected reading in and the reading prior to scribal addition in is remarkable. vruhnya riṅ yogya, ya ika yogyaya yogyayanhika:yogya:ya ikaṁ yogyaCf. div 78. sākṣya, i səḍaṅsḍəṁṅsədəṅ iṅ meh matya iṅ jro umahIñjromaḥhi jro Umaḥi joḥ, iṅ alasalap kunaṅ. striyāpy asaṁbhave kāryaṁ bālena sthavireṇa vā | śiṣyeṇa bandhunā vāpi dāsena bhr̥takena vā || MDhŚ 8.070 kunaṅ ikaṅ strīhistri bālenavalenayogya sakṣi lanā, rare dahat, atuha dahat,tuha dahat, pinakānak riṅpinakanakkapinakahanak riṁpinaka anak riṅ dharma, kadaṅ varga, hulun-hulun, upah-upahan, ika ta kabehka yogya sākṣi ri tatkālaniṅShould we emend kālaniṅ? See the situation in §66. āpadgatakālapadgata:kala:. bālavr̥ddhāturāṇāṁ tu sākṣyeṣu vadatāṁ mr̥ṣā | jānīyād asthirāṁ vācam utsiktamanasāṁ tathā || MDhŚ 8.071: It seems possible that our author read bālavr̥ddhaglānānāṁ, although it involves a ma-vipulā. kunaṅ yan rare lavan atuhayan· rare lavan yatuhvarare lavan yan a:tuha:rare lavan yan atuha, vvaṅ glāna prihati, kavruhana mithyamityamatyamivya ujarnyaujarnyan ri səḍaṅnyasḍəṁnyasədəṅnya pinakasākṣipinaka:hanasakṣi, de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, vvaṅ tan apagəh ujarnya, puru-puru tuturnya. sāhaseṣu ca sarveṣu steyasaṁgrahaṇeṣu ca | vāgdaṇḍayoś ca pāruṣye na parīkṣeta sākṣiṇaḥ || MDhŚ 8.072 kunaṅmvaṁṅ ikaṅ coracarita, strīsaṅgrahacarita-gracaritta-graha:,carittha, vākpāruṣyacarita, tan pilihən sākṣya ika kabehhika: sakṣya kabeḥsakṣya, hika ta kabeḥ. bahutvaṁ parigr̥hṇīyāt sākṣidvaidhe narādhipaḥ | sameṣu tu guṇotkr̥ṣṭān guṇidvaidhe dvijottamān || MDhŚ 8.073: The parallel in L882 suggests that our author read kulodgatān instead of dvijottamān. i səḍaṅnyansdaṁnyansḍaṁnyansədəṅnyan paḍa asākṣi ikaṅhika: mavyavahāraavyava:hara kālihka:la, asiṅAsaṅ akvehakveha sākṣinya pituhunpinituhun, de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, mapa yan paḍa kvehniṅkveḥ sākṣinya, asiṅ ləvih guṇaniṅ sākṣinya pituhun, mapa yan paḍa guṇaniṅ sākṣinya, asiṅ sujanmaniṅśujadmaniṁ sākṣinya pituhun saṅpituhun·, de saṁ prāgvivākapragivaka. samakṣadarśanāt sākṣyaṁ śravaṇāc caiva sidhyati | tatra satyaṁ bruvan sākṣī dharmārthābhyāṁ na hīyate || MDhŚ 8.074 ikaṅ mulat matanya marə̄mara, ya ika yogyaya yogya Ika:On the problem of word order here, cf. §73. sākṣya, enak denyāṅrəṅə̄denyaR̥ṅə:denya arəṅa prakāśavrakaśa kunaṅ, mojar pvamo pva ya satya satyavacana riṅ sabhā, apagəh riṅ dharmārthaḍa:rmatthaḍa:rmmata:darmarta, yogya ika makasākṣyaIka: sakṣyaika masaksya, de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka. sākṣī dr̥ṣṭaśrutād anyad vibruvann āryasaṁsadi | avāṅ narakam evaiti pretya svargāc ca hīyate || MDhŚ 8.075 hana sākṣi majarakən tan sakaton, tan sakarəṅə̄kaR̥ṅə:sakarəṅa denya, ya tikaika maṅguh avāṅ naraka maṅguḥnaraka:maṅgəhavana:raka:maṅgiḥhavannarakaIn the Sanskrit lemma, the word avāṅ has been entirely lost in . ri patinya, sinuṅsaṅsinusaṁ kramanya, kinəleṅ kavah, tinurunakən sakeṅsakiṁ svarganya deniṅ devata kabehtinurunakən ... kabehThis sentence seems to have been omitted in due to the scribe jumping from kavaḥ to kabeḥ.. yatrānibaddho ’pīkṣeta śr̥ṇuyād vāpi kiṁ cana | pr̥ṣṭas tatrāpi tad brūyād yathādr̥ṣṭaṁ yathāśrutam || MDhŚ 8.076 hana tatan tinulisakən ikaṅOr is the reading to be preferred here? sākṣi, tuhun vruha ta ya irikaṅ cinarita, byakta denyāṅrəṅə̄-rəṅa kunaṅ, takvananatakvanaThe expected verb from in the same construction is correctly transmitted in §33 takvanana ya irikaṅ dravya inakunya. irikaṅ cinarita, de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, majara ya irikaṅ sakaton sakarəṅə̄-rəṅe denya ṅūniṅuniṁ. eko ’lubdhas tu sākṣī syād bahvyaḥ śucyo ’pi na striyaḥ | strībuddher asthiratvāt tu doṣaiś cānye ’pi ye vr̥tāḥ || MDhŚ 8.077 ikaṅ vvaṅ tuṅgal tan lobhaa tuvi, tan yogya makasākṣyamakasakṣiha:, akvehaakeha, sādhuasadvahasadva:ha tuvi, yan strī-strī, tan yogyatanogya makasākṣyamaka:sakṣi, mataṅnyan maṅkana, tan atəguh buddhinya, svabhāvaniṅ strī-strī maṅkana, ikaṅ sākṣi len sakesaṁkve strī-strī pva ya ta, sambaddhasambambadasambadḍa:sambada pinakādinya, akveh ta halanya. svabhāvenaiva yad brūyus tad grāhyaṁ vyāvahārikam | ato yad anyad vibrūyur dharmārthaṁ tad apārthakam || MDhŚ 8.78: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. sabhāntaḥ sākṣiṇaḥ prāptān arthipratyarthisaṁnidhau | prāḍvivāko ’nuyuñjīta vidhinānena sāntvayan || MDhŚ 8.079 matakvanamatakvan saṅ prāgvivāka ri sākṣisaksyamatakvana ... sākṣi hana saṅ mavyavahāramavyava:ra kālih riṅ sabhā, ujaraniraUjarranira:,ujaranya ikahika:tika riṅ sākṣisakṣya, *makasādhanaa pājarnikaṅ mavyavahāraavyavara kālih i sirausira. yad dvayor anayor vittha kārye 'smiṁś ceṣṭitaṁ mithaḥ | tad brūta sarvaṁ satyena yuṣmākaṁ hy atra sākṣitā || MDhŚ 8.080 ulahnya dva-tuhu ikarika: irikaṅIka:ṁ vicāranyavicara: kālih, kita rakva kumavruhi ri ya, varahakənanta pratuhuntapr̥tuhun kabeh rii mami, kita rakva mulahakənamulahana pinakasākṣi, riṅ mavyavahāra kālih.kaliḥ || satyaṁ sākṣye bruvan sākṣī lokān prāpnoti puṣkalān | iha cānuttamāṁ kīrtiṁ vāg eṣā brahmapūjitā || MDhŚ 8.081 sākṣi pva kita, satya kita mapājara, kapaṅgih ta ikaṅ svarga uttama denta, ika yan satya vacanantaya vacananta:, inastuti kitakitta: deden bhaṭāra brahmā.A few sections down (), and then in all three manuscripts, we find the words kapaṅgih ta ikaṅ svarga uttama denta, preserved here only in , almost literally repeated: kapaṅguh ikaṅ svarga denta, mvaṅ kamokṣan, pasaṅgrahan sākṣye ’nr̥taṁ vadan pāśair badhyate vāruṇair bhr̥śam | vivaśaḥ śatam ājātīs tasmāt sākṣye vaded r̥tam || MDhŚ 8.082 hana pva sākṣy anr̥taśakṣi ya mr̥śasaksyarəta, inapusan deniṅ pāśa bhaṭāra baruṇa, tan vənaṅ molah makahīṅanmakahīṅanyaThe emendation is requireds by the maka- construction. We suspect a vowel killer was miswritten as pasangan ya. pañjanmanyapañjadmanya piṅsatus, maṅkana pva pāpanya, mataṅnyan satyaa ta denta mājar i səḍaṅnya pinakasākṣi. satyena pūyate sākṣī dharmaḥ satyena vardhate | tasmāt satyaṁ hi vaktavyaṁ sarvavarṇeṣu sākṣibhiḥ || MDhŚ 8.083 ikaṅ Ikaṁ sākṣi, pinavitran deniṅ kasatyanyakasatyanira, ulah yukti vr̥ddhi deniṅ kasatyanya, mataṅyan ujarakəna taujaraknanta satyaa, deniṅ sākṣiniṅ mavyavahārapavyavahara:, ikaṅ sarvavarṇa i səḍaṅnyansḍəṁnyansədaṅnya pavyavahāra. ātmaiva hy ātmanaḥ sākṣī gatir ātmā tathātmanaḥ | māvamaṁsthāḥ svam ātmānaṁ nr̥ṇāṁ sākṣiṇam uttamam || MDhŚ 8.84: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. ekam evādvitīyaṁ tat yat satyenāvabudhyate | satyaṁ svargasya sopānaṁ pārāvārasya naur iva || We tentatively restore the stanza in this way from the Old Javanese gloss and from the third stanza interpolated after 8.82 recorded in Olivelle's edition for his witnesses TMd4 GMd1 MTr4 MTr6 Tr1 [Jolly Gr] Mandlik [ṭa] KSS Dave. Olivelle represents the interpolated stanza as follows ekam evādvitīyaṁ tad yaṁ martyo nāvabudhyate | satyaṁ svargasya saṁyānaṁ pārāvārasya naur iva ||, but records a variant ekam evādvitīye tu tan matvaivāvabudhyate from TMd4. Another version of the stanza is attested in NSm vya. 191, reading in ab: ekam evādvitīyaṁ tat prāhuḥ pāvanam ātmanaḥ. tan pakarva pva saṅ kasatyankasaṁkasaṁ,kasatyanEmend sakeṅ kasatyan, as in next section? Or kasatyan Or saṅ hyaṅ kasatyan? vruh ikaṅiki loka, inaran ikaṅ satyenaInaraniṁ kasatyanahinaraniṁ kasatya:naṁinarahniṅ kasatyana, apan kasatya-vacanan ya aṇḍa mariṅhaṇḍarmariṁ svargaśvarggaśvarghgan·, kadi parahuprahu-niṅ vvaṅ mahyun məntasa-niṁ vaṁ mahyun matasa. nāsti satyāt paro dharmo nānr̥tāt pātakaṁ param | sthitiś ca loke dharmaś ca tasmāt satyaṁ viśiṣyate || This is the second of two stanzas interpolated after 8.82 recorded in Olivelle's edition, found in his witnesses GMd1 TMd4 Tr1 MTr4 MTr6 [Jolly Gr] Mandlik [ṭa] KSS Dave. Cf. Ślokāntara 7 nāsti satyāt paro dharmo nānr̥tāt pātakaṁ paraṁ | triloke ca hi dharma[ḥ] syāt tasmāt satyaṁ na lopayet ||. The latter stanza is also transmitted in Tantri Kamandaka §63. apan tan hana dharma lena sakeṅ kasatyan, iya dharma, iya satya, tan hana pāpapa:pan lenalenlekan sakeṅsakiṁṅkasatyan ... sakeṅ adva, iya pāpa, iya adva, saṅhārasaṅara ṅaranika kālih, mataṅyan ta pagəh ikaṅ lokaloka:ṁleka:, dharma hetunikahetuniṁka:, havyahayomataṅhyan tan yogyamataṅyan ayo ayo iṅilaṅakənAll manuscripts agree on this form, instead of hinilaṅakən. saṅ hyaṅ dharma de saṅdḍera saṁdesasaṁ mahyun məntasa. manyante vai pāpakr̥to na kaś cit paśyatīti naḥ | tāṁś ca devāḥ prapaśyanti svaś caivāntarapūruṣaḥ || MDhŚ 8.085 ikaṅ vvaṅ magave hala, vruh pva yan halaahala gavenya, tan hana kumavruhi ry akukumavruhiyyakukumavruha iriyaku, maṅkana kaharəpnyakaR̥p·nya madva, valiṅnya tan hana mulat iriyamulati hiriyamulahiriya, tan vruh pvatan· pvatan vruḥ pa yan saṅ hyaṅ ātma haneriya, kumavruhi sapolahnya, mataṅyan takvan ikaṅ ulahika hulaḥikaṅ unya salahsasalaḥ vəkasan de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, yadyapi vinunivanuni. hana saṅ hyaṅ tiga vəlas, kumavruhīriya-hiya:, ndya lvirnira: dyaurbhyoḥnyoḥbyoḥ bhūmirrumir āpo hr̥dayaṁapoḥ, candrārkāgnica:nḍrakagni-yamānilāḥ-yama:,niliṁ-yama:nilaṁ*-camaniliṁ, rātrirlatri,ratriḥratri dvisandhyedvisandyodvisandya dharmaś cadamaś ca:da:rmma:ś caḍarmasca, vr̥ttajñāḥvrattha:jñaḥvr̥ta:jñaḥvrətadñaḥ sarvadehinām dehinam· || -nehinam·-dahinamThe long omission in that starts here and ends after the paraphrase of the following stanza may be due to eyeskip from one punctuation sign to another.. dyaur bhūmir āpo hr̥dayaṁ candrārkāgniyamānilāḥ | rātriḥ saṁdhye ca dharmaś ca vr̥ttajñāḥ sarvadehinām || dyauḥnyoḥbyoḥ, ākāśa, bhūmiḥbhumibumi, ləmah, āpaḥhapaḥapaḥ, apaḥ, vvayvyay·vay, hr̥dayamhr̥daya:, ātma, candraḥcanḍra:candra, vulanUlan, arkaḥha:rkkaarka, āditya, agniḥAghniagni, apuy, yamaḥya:mmayama, mr̥tyu, anilaḥAnila:anila, aṅin, rātriḥratrirati, vəṅi, dvisandhye-saṇḍye-sandya, esuk sore, makādimkadi saṅ hyaṅ dharmaatmaḍa:mma:, sira kumavruhi sapolahniṅsapolahiṁpolahniṁ sarvajanmaśajadma ikaikana kabeh, mvaṅmvamvaḥ pāpanikaṅ vvaṅ yan adva makasākṣya kunaṅ, kadi tiṅkahniṅtiṅkahiṁ taliṅaniṅ ləmbu polahnya kāpusankasan deniṅ pāśapaśaḥ saṅ hyaṅ baruṇa, sevu kvehnyaśevūhakveḥnya, paḍomilətpanomilət ry avaknya, maṅkana pāpanikaṅ vvaṅ yan adva. satyaṁ sākṣye bruvan sākṣī lokān prāpnoti puṣkalān | MDhŚ 8.081ab kunaṅ kunaṁ yan satya kita, sakaton sakarəṅə̄ dentasakaR̥ṅəntentasakṣisakarəṅe kita, tuhv atayen tuhutuhuta, śīghra ujarakənanta, kapaṅguh ikaṅ svarga denta, mvaṅvaṁ kamokṣan, pasaṅgrahan, maṅkana liṅ saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka riṅ sākṣi. yasya dr̥śyeta saptāhād uktavākyasya sākṣiṇaḥ | rogo ’gnir jñātimaraṇam r̥ṇaṁ dāpyo damaṁ ca saḥ || MDhŚ 8.108 inujaraninujara pvekaṅ sākṣi maṅkana de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, vulatananira ta ya pituṅ vai lavasanyata ya pituṁ ve lavasnya ta ya pituṁ ve lavasnya, katəkankavkan· pva ikaṅyikaṁhikaṁ sākṣi lara, katunvan umahnya kunaṅkunaṁ katunvan umaḥnya, ikaṅ hutaṅ sinaṅguhnyapinaṅguḥnya tuhu, pan daṇḍaWe reject a prima facie interpretation as pandaṇḍa, since the only occurrences of such a word known to us from other texts are spelt paṅdaṇḍa and it would anyhow not make sense in the context. ikaṅ sākṣi. tripakṣād abruvan sākṣyam r̥ṇādiṣu naro ’gadaḥ | tad r̥ṇaṁ prāpnuyāt sarvaṁ daśabandhaṁ ca sarvataḥ || MDhŚ 8.107 ikaṅ vvaṅ tan pahutaṅ, səḍaṅnyan pinakasākṣipinaṅkanśa:kṣipika:nsakṣi riṅ r̥ṇacaritādi, tan paṅujarakənpahujarakən· ekadeśaniṅEka:deṣanihena:deṣani tripakṣa, likhita, sākṣi, bhuktisakṣi, likittha, bhūkti, sakvehnikaṅ hutaṅ sinaṅguhsinaṅguḥniṁ sinākṣyanya, kinonWe feel that kinonakən would have been better here. Must we emend the text? tagihakəna saṅ pradhanapraḍaṇnapr̥dana:pradana, irikaṅ sinaṅguhnyāhutaṅ, i kavijilanikaṅ-hikaṁ sākṣi maṅkana, ya daṇḍanyaḍanḍaṇḍanya, vuvuhana sapasapuluhanya-puluṅanya ikaṅ hutaṅ. asākṣikeṣu tv artheṣu mitho vivadamānayoḥ | avindaṁs tattvataḥ satyaṁ śapathenāpi lambhayet || MDhŚ 8.109 ikaṅ avyavahāra kālih, tan hana kumavruhi vicāranya, tātan vruh saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka ri hutaṅnya, konən asatyaa ikaṅhasatyaha:kaṅamatyaha ikaṅ avyavahāra kālih, asiṅ vikāra sorakəna pakṣanya. maharṣibhiś ca devaiś ca kāryārthaṁ śapathāḥ kr̥tāḥ | vasiṣṭhaś cāpi śapathaṁ śepe paijavane nr̥pe || MDhŚ 8.110 ikaṅ śapathasapadḍa:sapata ginavayakən deginavayakəde mahār̥ṣisaṁ maharəsi, deniṅ deva muvah, makadon kapəgataniṅmakatona:pgataniṁ vyavahāra, bhagavān vasiṣṭhavisista muvah makon maśapathaa rājapraja paijavana. na vr̥thā śapathaṁ kuryāt svalpe ’py arthe naro budhaḥ | vr̥thā hi śapathaṁ kurvan pretya ceha ca naśyati || MDhŚ 8.111 ikaṅ vvaṅ dinalihkadalih aṅalap vastu bari-bari, ndan tuhu yāṅalap, ndanḍan liṅnya, tan daṇḍanḍaṇḍa: tan palakvana *həlyanhəlyad denikaṅdeniṁṅ andalih, deniṅ hyunya səṅguhənsəṅgutən sādhu sadākālasadukalaḥ, maśapathamasavata ta ya, kadi tuhvatuva:tva: śapathāṅku, apanAvan bari-bari ikaṅ śinapathakənkusinapa:takənta liṅnya, tan vruh yan ləvih hala tikatikaṁnika tinəmunya, sakeṅsakiṁ kavədinya, hayva ta maṅkana, apan ikaṅ vvaṅ adva maśapathapasapaṭa:, hilaṅ maṅke, hilaṅ dlāhandlaha:, maṅkana liṅ saṅsa hyaṅ āgamaIt is unclear why the final phrase would have been omitted in .. kāminīṣu vivāheṣu gavāṁ bhakṣye tathendhane | brāhmaṇābhyupapattau ca śapathe nāsti pātakam || MDhŚ 8.112: Olivelle's mss. TMd3 and GMy of the Sanskrit text have vivādeṣu. The text available to the author of the Old Javanese paraphrase may rather have had vicāreṣu. Cf. §9. ri səḍaṅsḍaṁ-sədəṅ-niṅ strīhistri-Or edit istri-vicāra? Cf. cases of (hi)stri-kahyun.vicāra, dukut hārakakaraka-niṅ ləmbu, samidhaniṅ mayajña, katuluṅaniṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa, tan hanatana pāpaniṅ maśapatha maṅkanapa:pa masapaṭa: samaṅkana:. satyena śāpayed vipraṁ kṣatriyaṁ vāhanāyudhaiḥ | gobījakāñcanair vaiśyaṁ śūdraṁ sarvais tu pātakaiḥ || MDhŚ 8.113 kunaṅ deniṅ anapathaniṅhanapataniṁanapatani sākṣi, kasatyanta hilaṅahalaṅa, yan tanta satya kita, liṅ saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, manapathanimanapata:niṁ sākṣi brāhmaṇa, vāhanantaAvahananta, sañjatanta hilaṅa yan tan satya kita, liṅliṅa saṅ prāgvivākānpragivaka does not only repeat it usual error in spelling this word but also omits the enclitic particle attached to it. panapathanipanapaṭaniṁ sākṣi kṣatriyasatrya:triya. vənaṅ-vənaṅta hilaṅa, masta hilaṅa, yan tan satya kita, liṅanirānliṅanira panapathanipanapaṭaniṁ sākṣi vaiśya. sakvehniṅsakvehiṁ pāpa kabhuktiakabhūktihaka:bhuktiha:kabuktya denta, yenyan tan satya kita, liṅanira riṅ sākṣi śūdra. agniṁ vā hārayed enam apsu cainaṁ nimajjayet | putradārasya vāpy enaṁ śirāṁsi sparśayet pr̥thak || MDhŚ 8.114 kunaṅ yan dadi sākṣi ikaṅ śūdra, konən aṅgaməlaaṅamla:-gamla:-nāpuy, de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, konən asiləmakonasiL̥makonəsiL̥ riṅ vvay ajrovvaya,jrovaya:jro kunaṅ, təṇḍasny anaknikaṅa:nakna:kaṁ śūdra, usapən satuṅgal de saṅḍe saṁ tuṅgal saṁ prāgvivākapragivaka. yam iddho na dahaty agnir āpo nonmajjayanti ca | na cārtim r̥cchati kṣipraṁ sa jñeyaḥ śapathe śuciḥ || MDhŚ 8.115 tan vikāra deniṅ agni, tatan kasiləm deniṅ vvaivaive, tatan hana lara tinəmunya, kavruhana satya vacananikaṅtika:ṁ vacaṇasatya:nikaṁ vacaṇa:We retain the reading which is analogous to a phrase in §75: kavruhana mithya ujarnya de saṅ prabhu. sākṣi de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, yeka śuci ririṁ śapathaṣasapaṭṭa:ka ṅaranya. vatsasya hy abhiśastasya purā bhrātrā yavīyasā | nāgnir dadāha romāpi satyena jagataḥ spaśaḥ || MDhŚ 8.116 hana mahārājamavlara:ja vatsatatsa ṅaranira riṅ usāna, kinon aśapathaa tumuruneṅ apuyapviy· murub, deniṅ arinira, rambutiramrambutira: tuvi tanta gəsəṅagsəṅaEmend gəsəṅ? Cf. Dharma Pātañjala p. 324 tan gəsəṅ sira yan katunu riṅ apuy. But the Saṅ Hyaṅ Hayu (BnF Mal-Pol 161, 14v4) has tan pəgat deniṅ kadga, tan gəsəṅa deniṅ apuy. deniṅdeni satyaśaktya-kasatya-nira. yasmin yasmin vivāde tu kauṭasākṣyaṁ kr̥taṁ bhavet | tat tat kāryaṁ nivarteta kr̥taṁ cāpy akr̥taṁ bhavet || MDhŚ 8.117 ikaṅ vicāra r̥ṇādi, yan kūṭa sākṣinya, *asākṣitahanasakṣiha:Asakṣiha: yan *sinatyansanatyansisinatyan tuvi, sorakəna vicāranya de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, yadyapiyadyapu tuhu sapuhaka, asuṅa kalāntarakalaṣara:, tan yogyatanogya ika sorakənahika: sora,knakasorakəna pakṣanya, mutahakənamutakna pinaṅanya tapinaṅanyaṅata pva ya, *ananagih tan papihutaṅ gatinya. lobhān mohād bhayān maitrāt kāmāt krodhāt tathaiva ca | ajñānād bālabhāvāc casākṣyaṁ vitatham ucyate || MDhŚ 8.118 hana ta pva sākṣi tan satya, makahetu lobhanya, mūrkhanya, vədinya, pamitranya, hyunya, gələṅnya, puṅguṅnya, rarenya, yekaya ta sākṣi vitathavitavita:Or emend viṭa? ṅaranya, liṅ saṅ hyaṅ āgamaṅaOr should the reading be considered due to expansion in transmission?. eṣām anyatame sthāne yaḥ sākṣyam anr̥taṁ vadet | tasya daṇḍaviśeṣāṁs tu pravakṣyāmy anupūrvaśaḥ || MDhŚ 8.119 ikaṅ vvaṅ tan satya ri səḍaṅnyasḍəṁnyasḍaṁnyasədaṅnya pinakasākṣina:kasakṣi, riṅ r̥ṇacaritādi, lobha pinakādinya,The text as it stands is doubtful. We seem either to lack a word like makahetu before lobha, as in the previous section, or to require expunging the string r̥ṇacaritādi as carried over from , to obtain the string riṅ lobha pinakādinya as gloss of eṣām anyatame sthāne. It is provisionally the latter option that we retain. yogya ḍaṇḍa ikaEmend ḍaṇḍan ika? Cf. DISCUSSION IN INTRODUCTION., *paṅlelenaniṅ ḍaṇḍanya, yekājarakənaṅkva yathākrama. lobhāt sahasraṁ daṇḍyas tu mohāt pūrvaṁ tu sāhasam | bhayād dvau madhyamau daṇḍau maitrāt pūrvaṁ caturguṇam || MDhŚ 8.120 kunaṅ yan lobha kāraṇanyādvakarananyaṅa karanyadva, səḍaṅnyansḍəṅnyasḍaṁnya pinakasākṣi, sevu paṇa ḍaṇḍanyadandahanya, ma, su, 31, mā, 2. kunaṅ yanyanStarting here, read kunaṅ repeatedly at sentence start where omits this word. moha hetunyan advahetunya hadva, pūrvasāhasa-sahaśra: panḍaṇḍeriyamadanda iriya, ma, su, 32, mā, 2, təkanyaStarting here, read təkanya several times at sentence end where omits this word..The second half of the Sanskrit stanza is not paraphrased at all. It is likely that corresponding sentences of the Old Javanese text have been lost due to eye-skip. kāmād daśaguṇaṁ pūrvaṁ krodhāt tu triguṇaṁ param | ajñānād dve śate pūrṇe bāliśyāc chatam eva tu || MDhŚ 8.121 kunaṅ yan *istri-kahyunya hetunya advahistri-kahyunya hadvaiṁstri-kahyunyan hadva:stri-kahyunyan advaCf. two other case of istri-kahyun in §348-349, and an occurrence of strī-vicāra in . Assume the compound to be histri-kahyun or strī-kahyun?, daśaguṇakənadaguṇa:kna ikaṅ pūrvasāhasa-sahapa, ma, su, 7, mā, 1Conjecture 13?,təkanya. kunaṅ yan krodha hetunyahetunyan adva, ḍaṇḍa, ma, su, 4, mā, 11. kunaṅ yan puṅguṅnya hetunyahetunyan adva,ḍaṇḍa, ... puṅguṅnya hetunya adva rvaṅ atus paṇa panḍaṇḍeriyaḍaṇḍeriya:, mā, 10, təkanya. kunaṅ yan *milu-kelu hetunyahetunyan adva, satus paṇa panḍaṇḍeriya, mā, 5, təkanya. etān āhuḥ kauṭasākṣye proktān daṇḍān manīṣibhiḥ | dharmasyāvyabhicārārtham adharmaniyamāya ca || MDhŚ 8.122 ḍaṇḍaniṅcaṇḍaniṁ kūṭasākṣi sampun vinarahakənvinarahakanvirahakan prabhedanyapranedanyaprabedaniṁ prabedanya, laṅgəṅa saṅ hyaṅ dharma donyadenya, mvaṅ tan hanaaniṅananiṁṅhananiṅ umulahakənumulahakəniṅ adharma.None of the witnesses has final punctuation after this sentence. kauṭasākṣyaṁ tu kurvāṇāṁs trīn varṇān dhārmiko nr̥paḥ | pravāsayed daṇḍayitvā brāhmaṇaṁ tu vivāsayet || MDhŚ 8.123 ikaṅ kṣatriyasatryasatriyaCf. divs 66, 98, 125 on the spelling of this word., veśya, śūdra, gumavayakənagumavehaknagumaveya kūṭasākṣi, səḍaṅnyasḍəṁnyasḍaṁnya pinakasākṣiniṅ avyavahāra-niṁ vyavahara, ḍaṇḍan yathāparādha yayataparadayayataparada:ryyayataparadayaThe term yathāparādha recurs in ., ri huvusnya dohakəna ya, kunaṅ brāhmaṇānbrahmaṇnayan brahmana kūṭasākṣi, tan ḍaṇḍanḍaṇḍa, dohakəna juga sira, dhārmika saṅ prabhu yan maṅkana deniran ḍaṇḍa. iti sākṣicaritaIti sakṣi caritadiItaṁ* sakṣicaritthadaṁ*.
Topic of the court daśa sthānāni daṇḍasya manuḥ svāyaṁbhuvo ’bravīt | triṣu varṇeṣu tāni syur akṣato brāhmaṇo vrajet || MDhŚ 8.124 bhaṭāra svāyambhuvasva:yambuhva:śvayambuhva:svayambuhva manu, mavarah sira sthānaniṅ ḍaṇḍa riṅ trivarṇa, sapuluh kvehnya, kunaṅ liṅirakunalaṅira riṅ brāhmaṇa, tan hana pakənanikaṅpakaḍananiṁpakənaniṅkaṅ brāhmaṇa,tan hana ... brāhmaṇa iṅgata juga. upastham udaraṁ jihvā hastau pādau ca pañcamam | cakṣur nāsā ca karṇau ca dhanaṁ dehas tathaiva ca || MDhŚ 8.125 lvirnya, upastha, vətəṅvtaṁvətaṁ, ilat, taṅan, suku, mata, taliṅa, iruṅ, pāyu, avak, nahan sthānaniṅsvarṇaniṁsvananiṁstananiṁ ḍaṇḍa riṅ trivarṇa,Our restitution is based on the parallel in . sapuluh kvehnya. anubandhaṁ parijñāya deśakālau ca tattvataḥ | sārāparādho cālokya daṇḍaṁ daṇḍyeṣu pātayet || MDhŚ 8.126 The OJ gloss suggests our author knew the variant reading sārāsāraṁ tathālokya. paganti-gantiniṅpagantagantaniṁ sahurniṅ mavyavahāra kālih, kavruhanakavruha de saṅ prāgvivāka, deśanya, kālanya, maṅkanātahmaṅkanata, ujarnya adondon kavruhana ta denira, tibākənatibaka:knatibakakəna tataṁ ḍaṇḍa irikaṅ yogya ḍaṇḍanḍaṇḍa. adharmadaṇḍanaṁ loke yaśoghnaṁ kīrtināśanam | asvargyaṁ ca paratrāpi tasmāt tat parivarjayet || MDhŚ 8.127 kunaṅ yan tan patut, yukti denira saṅ prabhu mandaṇḍa, hala sirama:nəṇḍa:, hala sira:manaṇḍa: halanira, hilaṅ yoganira, hilaṅ puṇyanira, hilaṅ svarganira,Ilaṁ śvarganira:, Ilaṁ punyanira:, mataṅnyan hilaṅakənanirahilaṅa:kna,nira taṅ andaṇḍataṁ daṇḍatandaṇḍa tan yukti. adaṇḍyān daṇḍayan rājā daṇḍyāṁś caivāpy adaṇḍayan | ayaśo mahad āpnoti narakaṁ caiva gacchati || MDhŚ 8.128 yan panḍaṇḍapaḍaṇḍa saṅ prabhu irikaṅ tan yogya ḍaṇḍan,ḍaṇḍa,All witnesses show a higher-level punctuation sign here, not the one we normally represent as comma. yan tan panḍaṇḍapaḍaṇḍamandanda sira irikaṅikaṁ yogya ḍaṇḍa saṅ prabhu, amaṅgih duryaśaḍūryyaṣan sira, amaṅgihhamaṅguḥamaṅguḥ pāpa ḍaṇḍa saṅ prabhu ... amaṅgih pāpa ḍəṇḍa, hamaṅguḥ dūryyaṣa: saṁ prabhū, makadḍi hamaṅguḥ papa:- The reading is smoother with regard to the placement of saṅ prabhu; we have nevertheless decided to adopt the word order and punctuation of . The somewhat awkward placement of saṅ prabhu could be smoothened by moving the punctuation mark to stand before instead of after saṅ prabhu. naraka-nraka: sira. vāgdaṇḍaṁ prathamaṁ kuryād dhigdaṇḍaṁ tadanantaram | tr̥tīyaṁ dhanadaṇḍaṁ tu vadhadaṇḍam ataḥ param || MDhŚ 8.129 ujar ahalaUjaraha:ujarala gavayakənagava:kna ḍaṇḍa de saṅ prabhu rumuhun, kapiṅrvanyakapiṁrvana:, ujar kelik-elik, kapiṅtiganya, ḍaṇḍa dhanaḍaṇḍa dana:daṅda danda dana, kapiṅpatnya, ḍaṇḍa pati. vadhenāpi yadā tv etān nigrahītuṁ na śaknuyāt | tadaiṣu sarvam apy etat prayuñjīta catuṣṭayam || MDhŚ 8.130 yadyapi vənaṅ anibākənaanibakakəna ḍaṇḍa saṅ prabhu, hayva vavaṅ dahat, ya ta kramaniṅ ḍaṇḍa tibākənaniratibakanira:, irikaṅ yogya ḍaṇḍanḍaṇḍa. lokasaṁvyavahārārthaṁ yāḥ saṁjñāḥ prathitā bhuvi | tāmrarūpyasuvarṇānāṁ tāḥ pravakṣyāmy aśeṣataḥ || MDhŚ 8.131 ṅaranikaṅ pirak, tāmratambra, mās, yan patəmahanpatəmagan saga, kupaṅ, māṣama:s·, tahil, varahakəna riṅ loka, makadonmaṅka:don kavruhanya, ya tikājayateka:ja-rakənaṅkva kabeh. jālāntaragate bhānau yat sūkṣmaṁ dr̥śyate rajaḥ | prathamaṁ tat pramāṇānāṁ trasareṇuṁ pracakṣate || MDhŚ 8.132: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. trasareṇavo ’ṣṭau vijñeyā likṣaikā parimāṇataḥ | tā rājasarṣapas tisras te trayo gaurasarṣapaḥ || MDhŚ 8.133 ikaṅ vvaluvaṁluvvaṁlu trasareṇu, ṅa, ləbū katon səḍəṅiṅsḍaṅisədaṅiṁ raviteja sumənə̄ riṅravisuteja:, sumnərriṁraviteja sumna riṁ tavaṅ, yeka salikṣā ṅaranyasalikṣa:, ṅa, tigaṅ likṣā, sasavisaṅ asvavi saṁ sasavi putih ṅaranya, tigaṅ sasavi putih, sasavi kuniṅ ṅaranya. sarṣapāḥ ṣaḍ yavo madhyas triyavaṁ tv eva kr̥ṣṇalam | pañcakr̥ṣṇalako māṣas te suvarṇas tu ṣoḍaśa || MDhŚ 8.134 nəm sasavi kuniṅ, təṅah yava ṅaranya, tigaṅ yava, sakr̥ṣṇalamsakrənalam ṅaranya, limaṅṅaranya, kr̥ṣṇalam, samāṣasama:s· ṅaranya, nəm bəlas māṣamas· ṅaranyaWe conjecturally remove ṅaranya from the text and emend transmitted mas· to māṣa., satahil kunakunaṁThis is the first occurrence of the expression tahil kuna whose second word is quite consistently transmitted as kunaṁ (though it incidentally figures as kuna here in right before the word ṅaranya); apparently the meaning of the term had become obscure already by the time of the archetype of our manuscripts. ṅaranya, mā, 4, yan iṅ pirak. palaṁ suvarṇāś catvāraḥ palāni dharaṇaṁ daśa | dve kr̥ṣṇale samadhr̥te vijñeyo rūpyamāṣakaḥ || MDhŚ 8.135 pataṅkunaṁ pataṁ tahil kunakunaṁ, ya satahil pirak ṅaranya, ikaṅ ikaṅ sapuluh tahil kunakunaṁ, ya sadharaṇasadara ṅaranya, yan iṅ mas, ma, su, 2, mā,2, ṅa, ma:, 8, təkanya yan iṅ pirakyan pirak·, ikaṅ pirak sasaga vratnya, ya kaliṅaniṅ dve kr̥ṣṇale samadhr̥tedve kr̥ṣṇale, sama:dr̥tedve trapbale, samadr̥teedvakrəsnale, samadrəteAll witnesses read a punctuation sign between dve kr̥ṣṇale and samadhr̥te., tarajvanana kālih, vehən paḍa bvatnya, ya kaliṅaniṅ samadhr̥tesamadr̥te, təkākənatkaknəntkanəntəkakən ta limaṅ saga, ikaṅ mas, vehənveḥ paḍa vratnya, deniṅ amrati, ikaṅ limaṅ saga vratniṅ pirak, ku, 1, ṅaranya, ikaṅ limaṅ saga vratniṅ mas, ku, 1, ṅaranya, rūpyamāṣakaḥ rupyaḥma:slaka: rupanyamasakaḥ rupyamasakaḥ ṅaranya. te ṣoḍaśa syād dharaṇaṁ purāṇaś caiva rājataḥ | kārṣāpaṇas tu vijñeyas tāmrikaḥ kārṣikaḥ paṇaḥ || MDhŚ 8.136 ikaṅ nəm bəlas māṣamas· riṅ mas, dharaṇakarana ṅaranyaṅa, ikaṅ nəm bəlas, i pirakpirak·ikaṁ pirak, iṁ pirak, purāṇasuraṇa ṅaranya. kunaṅ ikaṅ saga pamrat pirak, ya ta pamratapamr̥tthapatratū riṅ gaṅsa, ikaṅ gaṅsa sasaga vratnya, ya sakārṣāpaṇaya ta ka:rṣapaṇa ṅaranya, mapa yanmapan yan tāmratvaratamra sasaga vratnya, sapaṇa ṅaranya. dharaṇāni daśa jñeyaḥ śatamānas tu rājataḥ | catuḥsuvarṇiko niṣko vijñeyas tu pramāṇataḥ || r̥ṇe deye pratijñāte pañcakaṁ śatam arhati | apahnave taddviguṇaṁ tan manor anuśāsanam || MDhŚ 8.137 and 8.139. It seems that our author's copy of MDhŚ may have lacked 139abc, with 139d immediately following 137d. Stanza 138 will be paraphrased below. A long interpolation in that cites stanza 139 in full along with an unidentified stanza complicates the evaluation of the text-critical situation. ikaṅ sapuluh tahil kunakunaṁ, ma, su, 2ṅa, māma:s·, 8, vratnya pirak, sadharaṇa ṅaranya, kunaṅ ikaṅ pirak paṇa sapuluhsapuluh pana pirak ma, kunaṅ ikaṅ ... sapuluh ma kunaṁ Ikaṁ pirak ṣapuluḥ pana:, ma:, || ○ || R̥ṇadeve vratijñante, pañcama siṁtam ahartti, hapanave dadviguṇiṁ, tan manom anuṣasaniṁ, ka, riṅ mavutaṁ yan masaṅketa:, yapva ta mityeṁ vuhus riṁ purvvaka:, ḍaṇḍanika: de bhūpatya, pañca satapaṇa, kunaṁṅ apuvara haṅasiḥ dvigunotama ḍaṇḍa || ○ || nipṭiṁ vak nityaṁ* krodaṣṭaṁ*, valat śobr̥ṁ* namasṭadḍi, niṣṭe maḍyamaṁ* hutamaṁ*, purvvakaṁ* mituva ḍaṇḍaṁ*, ka, hana ta ya: vaṁṅ apihutaṁ, tinagiḥ pihutaṁnya, tan paveḥ vetan drəvenya, hasr̥ṁ saṁṅ apihutaṁ, maṅalap sadr̥venya, maṅalap histri, sunu, bhūmi, nūn pasu sakalviriṁ patik vənaṁ yata hinalap·, vetniṁ kaṁniṣṭa vinaṅūn mityeṁṅ ūjar,, maka:don hinira:-hira:, haṅiṅindəti, haṅlindihi, tan druḥ kaṁṅ adr̥ve vaṁṅ apihutaṁ, lumka:s kaṅśa:seṁ tan hambava cihna Utər· daL̥m, hikya ṅaran valat sahaṣa havalat śobra, hiṅar:vakən vinalik rantas vitya:, mvaṁ tinibakna ḍaṇḍa mahirantaṁn kaṁ sa:hasobradḍi, kunəṁ pinaraṅgvakna vutaṁ, lavan daṇḍanekaṁ sahaṣa, vnaṅ pasaṅana vrat niṣṭa maḍyotama, ye niṣṭa vit hutaṁ mvaḥ paṅamet· sinahaṣa:, niṣṭa: ḍaṇḍa,, 5000, yen madya paṅamete, ḍaṇḍa, 10000, hutama paṅamete, ḍaṇḍa, 20000, sapaṅamete haṅsula:kna riṁ kaṁṅ avutaṅ, vaṣana, ḍaṇḍa riṁ saṁ bhūpatya || 0 || kunaṁ Ikaṁ pratekaniṁ harta:, sapaṇna:, 20, limaṁ paṇa:, 2, ku, tkeṁ hartha, kunaṁ ikaṁ pirak pana sapuluḥ, ma:, Manuscript inserts a substantial interpolation between two iterations of the lemma. The interpolation notably contains the full text of MDhŚ 8.139 and an unidentified Sanskrit stanza. Although having stanza 8.139, with paraphrase, in this general part of the text is potentially attractive, the fact that the stanza is quoted in full is suspect, and the precise locus where it is inserted interrupts the paraphrase of 8.137. On these grounds, we favor the hypothesis that the segment of text found only in this witness is extraneous to our text. su, 2ṅa, mā, 8, təkanya, śatamāna ṅaranyasatapana:, ṅasatama: ṅaranya, kunaṅ ikaṅ pataṅ tahil ma, su, 1, təkanya pirak, saniṣkasaniskara ṅaranya, kavruhana hīṅan bhaṭāra manu mavarah-varahmavaraḥ. paṇānāṁ dve śate sārdhe prathamaḥ sāhasaḥ smr̥taḥ | madhyamaḥ pañca vijñeyaḥ sahasraṁ tv eva cottamaḥ || MDhŚ 8.138 rvaṅ atus limaṅlima puluh paṇa, paṇapaṇa ṅaranya, tāmrahamra saga, mā,In order for the arithmetic in this paragraph to work, we absolutely need this sentence to state a quantity of twelve and a half māṣas (i.e., 12 māṣa + 2 kupaṅ). Should we also supply ma before mā? Probably not, as ku in the last sentence is also not preceded by ma. For our author, ma, su seems to have been a fixed combination with ma no longer able freely to be combined with other units, as happens in the epigraphic corpus. 12, ku, 2ṅa, təkanya yan iṅ pirakpira:k·yani pirak·, ḍaṇḍaniṅ prathamasāhasa. limaṅ atus paṇa, ma, su, 1, mā, 9, təkanya, ḍaṇḍaniṅ madhyamasāhasa. sevu paṇa, ma, su, 1, ... sevu paṇa, ma, su, 3, mā, 2lpa, təkanyatəkaniṁ təkanya yan pirak, ḍaṇḍanikaṅ uttamasāhasa. mapan ikaṅ limaṅ paṇa, ku, 11, ku, təkanya riṅ pirak.yen pirak· ||təkanya riṁ pirak. iti pana-carita kunaṁ.Since it is not matched in , we reject the interesting chapter colophon inserted here in . vasiṣṭhavihitāṁ vr̥ddhiṁ sr̥jed vittavivardhinīm | aśītibhāgaṁ gr̥hṇīyān māsād vārdhuṣikaḥ śate || MDhŚ 8.140 kunaṅ pavarahvaraḥ bhagavān vasiṣṭhavisista, riṅ kalāntara, gavayakənakavayakna saṅ pradhana, sapavvaluṅ-puluhan iṅ satussatis māṣama:s·, de saṅ pradhanāṅalāntarakənapraḍana:, ṅalantaraknapr̥daṇa:kalantarakna riṅ salek, mā, 1, ku, 1,ku,ksaAll witnesses omit the number 1 that is required after unit ku. təkaniṅ kalāntaraniṅṅalaṅanta:raniṁaṅalantaraniṁ pihutaṅ, ma, su, 9ma:, 1, 9, mā, 6, riṅ sapuluh tahunA riṁ salek·A, riṁ salek·The witnesses clearly point to a value of 9 suvarṇas. This means the total number of māṣas in question is at least 144, i.e., a factor of 10 times the annual yield on the loan. For this reason, we conjecture that the number corruptly transmitted as A in all witnesses was a 6, reject the reading riṅ salek despite unanimous manuscript support for it, and conjecture sapuluh tahun. It is not evident why our author would have thought of a ten-year period in the present context, but it may be relevant that this duration will be mentioned explicitly two times not far below ().. maṅkana liṅ bhagavān vasiṣṭha. dvikaṁ śataṁ vā gr̥hṇīyāt satāṁ dharmam anusmaran | dvikaṁ śataṁ hi gr̥hṇāno na bhavaty arthakilbiṣī || MDhŚ 8.141 hanan mā 2maṅu deniṅ aṅalantarakənaṅalantara:kənya, riṅ satus māṣama:s·, keṅətakəna pavarah bhagavān vasiṣṭha, tan tininda sira yan maṅkana. dvikaṁ trikaṁ catuṣkaṁ ca pañcakaṁ ca śataṁ samam | māsasya vr̥ddhiṁ gr̥hṇīyād varṇānām anupūrvaśaḥ || MDhŚ 8.142 kunaṅ prabhedanikaṅprabeda sira yan maṅkana:, kaṁ kalāntara, dadi mā, 2ma:s·, 2mas·, dadi ma:s·, 2ma:s·, ṅsa, dadi mā, 3ma:s·, 3ma:s·, ṅvya, dadi mā, 4ma:s·, 4ma:s·, A, dadi mā, 5ma:s·, 5, salek riṅ satus, maṅkana de saṅ pradhanāṅalapa kalāntara riṅ saleksalekya, tumūtanaṅ caturvarṇa, yanyanya brāhmaṇa mahutaṅ, aṅalāntarananahaṅalantarana:Aṅalantarana:haṅalantarana, mā, 2, yanyanyayenya kṣatriyasatryasaktrya mahutaṅ, aṅalāntaranana, mā, 3ma:s·, yanyanyayenya vaiśya mahutaṅveśya mavutaṁṣyai mahutaṁvaiśya:Utaṁ, aṅalāntaranana, mā, 4ma:, A, yanyanya śūdra mahutaṅśudra:Utaṁ, aṅalāntarananahaṅalantara mā, 5, riṅ saleksaleknyasalekya. na tv evādhau sopakāre kausīdīṁ vr̥ddhim āpnuyāt | na cādheḥ kālasaṁrodhān nisargo ’sti na vikrayaḥ || MDhŚ 8.143 kunaṅ saṅ manaṇḍa-naṇḍasama:naṇḍanaṇḍasamana:naṇḍa:naṇḍa:, yan *paṅupakārapaṅuvaka:ra ikaṅ sinaṇḍanya, hayva jugāṅalap kalāntaranya, lavan ta muvah, ikaṅ saṇḍa tanhan hana gantanyagantaknanyaha:nta:knanya *lələbakəna, mvaṅ dvaləndvaL̥m·, yan tan təkan iṅ samayanya lələbaL̥L̥bakna. na bhoktavyo balād ādhir bhuñjāno vr̥ddhim utsr̥jet | mūlyena toṣayec cainam ādhisteno ’nyathā bhavet || MDhŚ 8.144 ikaṅ saṇḍa tan kabhuktia deniṅ saṅ manaṇḍade saṁ masaṇḍa:, yan tan papobhayapasobhayamapoya: kabhuktianyabhuktiyanya, yapvan paṅaṅgo saṇḍa, tan pakalāntarapaṅalantara ikaṅ saṇḍa. yan kṣayakṣatriya ikaṅ saṇḍa, yanyen iṅaṅgoidaṅgo de saṅ manaṇḍa, *həlyanana samūlyanikaṅlyana:na samulyahikaṁəlyanikaṁ saṇḍa. yankunaṁ yan tan aṅga maṅəlyananahaṅga maṅalyananaaṅga ṅəlyana:naaṅgatṅəlyanana, maliṅ saṇḍasansanda ṅaranya yanṅaran vaṁ maṅkana. ādhiś copanidhiś cobhau na kālātyayam arhataḥ | avahāryau bhavetāṁ tau dīrghakālam avasthitau || MDhŚ 8.145 ikaṅ saṇḍa lavan patuvavapatuvavan·patuvavahan·, ikaika ika ta kālih, tan yogya kalavasana, halanya yan kalavasan, lələb, mvaṅ inakuanuku de saṅ patuvavan. saṁprītyā bhujyamānāni na naśyanti kadā cana | dhenur uṣṭro vahann aśvo yaś ca damyaḥ prayujyate || MDhŚ 8.146 kunaṅ yan sobhayapobhaya kabhukti ikaṅ saṇḍa, mvaṅ patuvava lavasa tuvitvi, tan lələbalələb, de saṅ manaṇḍa, mvaṅ tan *akunən dravya de saṅ patuvavan. ikaṅkunaṁ hikaṁ ləmbu, uṣṭra, sapisampi, kuda, ariṅa ta ya, yan saṇḍakna, patuvavaknatuvavakəna kunaṅ, kalavasana tuvi, tan lələba, yalələba ta ya de saṅ manaṇḍa, tan akunən dravya de saṅ patuvavan. yat kiṁ cid daśavarṣāṇi saṁnidhau prekṣate dhanī | bhujyamānaṁ parais tūṣṇīṁ na sa tal labdhum arhati || MDhŚ 8.147 ikaṅ saṅ manaṇḍa, mvaṅ saṅ patuvavanmatuvavapatuvavaatuvava, salviraniṅsalvirriṁ saṇḍanya, salviraniṅsalviriṁ patuvavanya, bhinukti ta ya deniṅ len ririṁ samīpanya, sapuluh tahun lavasanyalavasnya, mulat tamula:tamulata ya humənəṅya:, Umnəṁ ta ya:, ikaṅIkahika: vvaṅ maṅkana yogya makadravyaanyahika:dravyahanyaika makadrəvyahanya. ikaṅ vvaṅ masaṇḍā, matuvava kunaṅIkaṁ vvaṁ matuvavaikaṁ vaṁ matuvava, mulat ta yanmulata: yanmula yamulat yan bhinukti dravyanya, humənəṅUmnəṁ ta ya, hana sapuluh tahun lavasanya, hayva ya iṅucap-ucapṅucap-ucapWe consider that two syllables have been lost in the manuscript transmission and restore them based on the partial parallel hayva ya hiṅucap-ucap de saṅ prabhu in div ???. ikaṅika saṅ madravya, apan alah iṅucaphinucapiṅucapan gatinika. ikaṅriṁ vvaṅ vavaṅvaṁ vvaṅ agələṅ, tan hənəṅakən dravyanya bhinuktiniṅbinukti, riṁṅbhinuktini len·binukti iṁ len ririṁ samīpanya, ika ta pamuktinikaṅ vvaṅ manaṇḍa, mvaṅ saṅ patuvavanmatuvavapatuvava maṅkana, maṅəlyanana ta ya irikaṅ sabhinuktinyasaṁ binuktinya, i saṅ masaṇḍamanaṇḍamanaṇḍa:, mvaṅ saṅ matuvavapatuvavatuvava. ajaḍaś ced apogaṇḍo viṣaye cāsya bhujyate | bhagnaṁ tad vyavahāreṇa bhoktā tad dravyam arhati || MDhŚ 8.148 ikaṅ vvaṅ tan lilu, tan lumpuh, tan abəhəbaḥ, bhinuktiniṅ len dravyanya ri samīpanya, humənəṅ ta ya, ikaṅ amuktimamukti dravya maṅkana yogya makadravya ya, apan amənaṅ ucapənhucapanhiṅucapaniṅucapan gatinya. kunaṅ yan vehənvehinvehan asatyaa, alah ikahalahi Ika, amənaṅ iṅhamna IkaṁṅAmnaṁ hikaṁ āgama, alah riṅ satya ṅaranya. ādhiḥ sīmā bāladhanaṁ nikṣepopanidhiḥ striyaḥ | rājasvaṁ śrotriyasvaṁ ca na bhogena praṇaśyati || yaḥ svāminānanujñātam ādhiṁ bhūṅkte ’vicakṣaṇaḥ | tenārdhavr̥ddhir moktavyā tasya bhogasya niṣkr̥tiḥ || MDhŚ 8.149-150: Our author seems to have known the first Sanskrit stanza with the reading ādhisīmā. It is unclear whether he knew the second at all — whether the phrases after tan ilaṅa ya still concern the first stanza, whether they are a loose rendering of stanza 150 as we know it, or whether they correspond to a radically different version of that stanza. The use of a lowest-level instead of final punctuation after tan ilaṅa ya in all three manuscripts suggests that the scribes regarded what follows as part of the preceding paraphrase. ādhisīmā, sīmā sinaṇḍakən, dravyaniṅdrəvya si rare uvuh-uvuh tinuvavakən, matuvava tan pasākṣī, matuvava sinākṣyakən, dravyaniṅdravya saṁ brāhmaṇa tinuvavakənhinuvava:kən·tinvavakən·, dravyaniṅ ratusaṁ prabu tinuvavakən, ika ta kabeh, tan ilaṅa ya, yadyapinyadyapi kabhuktia tuvi, katəka riṅ kadaśavarṣakatkaha daśavarṣahakatəkaha dasavarsaOr emend to katəka rikaṅ daśavarṣa?, maṅəlyanana kaṅ amuktihəlyana:na de saṁṅ amuktya maṅkana:elyanana de saṅ amuktya maṅana. kusīdavr̥ddhir dvaiguṇyaṁ nātyeti sakr̥d āhr̥tā | dhānye sade lave vāhye nātikrāmati pañcatām || MDhŚ 8.151 ikaṅ pihutaṅ alavas yayen tan kalāntarankakalantaran, alapənhalapanAlapan kalāntaranya pisan ririṁ satahun, kaməna yayanWe emend because kaməna is never construed with yan, while kaməna + ya + irrealis verb form is found, e.g., in the Patitihan charter (5r4–5) tigaṁ vṅi kamnā ya L̥L̥ba. ləpihakəna, kunaṅ yan hutaṅ dhānyada:nyadanya, sadata:yasaya:, lava, vāhyavaya, larvavaya, lava:, alavas taAlavasata ya tan kasahurankatahura:n·katahuran·, pañcaguṇā panahuranyapanahurnya. pari, ləṅa, atakyatak·, ya dhānya ṅaranyaṅa. kapas, bəsarbəras, kasumba, ya sinaṅguhsinəṅgaḥsinaṅgaḥ sadasmaya:saya:saya ṅaranyaṅaṅaraka:. miñak, pəhan, ghr̥taghaṭagatta:gataOur emendation is inspired by such parallels as TK 52.25 (goh uttama deniṅ pəhanya mvaṅ ghr̥tanya) and Tk 1.69a (gr̥ta pə̄han sinaṅguh pavitra)., yeka lava ṅaranya. tilam, pataraṇapataraṇa:pataranaOJED records only the spelling paṭāraṇa, but the spelling with ta found in our witness is actually very widespread., ḍampa, payuṅ, yeka vāhyavayavavyahya ṅaranya. kr̥tānusārād adhikā vyatiriktā na sidhyati | kusīdapatham āhus taṁ pañcakaṁ śatam arhati || MDhŚ 8.152 vr̥ddhinikaṅ hutaṅ kalavasan, tan yogya ləpihakənakalpihakna ya, yan kuraṅ sakeṅsakiṁ ləpih, maṅkana maryādāniṅ maṅalantarakən liṅ saṅ paṇḍita. liṅ saṅ paṇḍiṭa. muvahmvaḥ yogya ikaṅ limaṅ kupaṅ kalāntaraniṅ mās summa:s·ma:s·, 6, mā, 4. nātisāṁvatsarīṁ vr̥ddhiṁ na cādr̥ṣṭāṁ punar haret | cakravr̥ddhiḥ kālavr̥ddhiḥ kāritā kāyikā ca yā || MDhŚ 8.153: Several manuscripts cited in the critical edition have kārikā (the form cited here by our author) rather than kāritā, the reading adopted by Olivelle. hayva ləvih sakeṅ satahun, hayva kuraṅ sakeṅ satahun, gənəpanagnəpana: Uga satahun, de saṅ pradhanāṅalap kalāntarapradana:ṅalantara: kalap·pr̥daṇa:ṅalantara kalap·Since the sentence seems to us incapable of interpretation with the words aṅalāntara kālap that the witnesses transmit here, we are forced to resort to conjecturing that an inversion of word order has occurred, induced by the fact that aṅalap and aṅalāntara have their first two syllables in common.. hanahana ta seems to have transposed particle ta here from the following sentence. cakravr̥ddhi kālavr̥ddhi kārikāvr̥ddhi kāyikāvr̥ddhi cakravr̥di, kayika:vr̥di cakr̥vradi ṅaranika:, Ana: kayika:vr̥di hana kayikavrədi ṅaranya. hana ta kalāntaraka:ntara: inilvakənInilvan iṅ vit de saṅ pradhanapradana:pr̥dana , milu kinalāntaran, yeka cakravr̥ddhi ṅaranyaṅaran·. hana kalāntara inalapaninalapn aṅkən lek, yaye kālavr̥ddhi ṅaranya. kinalāntaran konkonanThe witnesses agree on a reading that seems corrupt. We are unsure how to emend. Among options we have considered are kalāntara-n kinonkon, kalāntara-n kinonakən, ikaṅ hutaṅ kinalāntaraniṅ konkonkan, kalāntaraniṅ konkonkan. denikaṅde saṁdeniṁkaṁ mahutaṅ, ya kārikākarika:-vr̥ddhi ṅaranya. kunaṅ ikaṅ hutaṅ pinakavit rikaṅriṁka valija, kinalāntarankalantaran dol-dolanya, satuməkanaṅ kalāntaraniṅn kalantara:niṁstumkunaṁ kalantaraniṁ hutaṅ, ya kāyikāvr̥ddhi ṅaranya. r̥ṇaṁ dātum aśakto yaḥ kartum icchet punaḥ kriyām | sa dattvā nirjitāṁ vr̥ddhiṁ karaṇaṁ parivartayet || MDhŚ 8.154 ikaṅ kalāntarakalantaran yan apanas, bhinukti ya rumuhun, deniṅ mahutaṅ, amalaku ya iṅaṇḍəhhiṅanḍiḥThe same sentence pattern is found in the Ramwi charter of 804 Śaka (1v11) mamalaku ya Inaṇḍəḥ gavainya. kalāntaranya, inubhayan pvakapva yānyanaya:na movaha putra.All witnesses read a lowest-level punctuation sign here and after the gloss of the next stanza: it seems that MDhŚ08.154–156 were considered to form a group. adarśayitvā tatraiva hiraṇyaṁ parivartayet | yāvatī sambhaved vr̥ddhis tāvatīṁ dātum arhati || MDhŚ 8.155 yan tan vənaṅ ikaṅ ahutaṅ ri kalāntaraka:rantara mapanasmanəs·mapanəs·panas, sahurənyasahuranasavuranya juga ikaṅ hutaṅ, muvahmvaḥmvaṁ sakvehanikaṅ kalāntara, sahurənsavuR̥nyasahurənya ta ya. cakravr̥ddhiṁ samārūḍho deśakālavyavasthitaḥ | atikrāman deśakālau na tatphalam avāpnuyāt || MDhŚ 8.156 hana vvaṅ mañakravr̥ddhyakənma:ñakravr̥dihakənmañakr̥vr̥dhḍiyakənmañakrəvrədyakən pihutaṅnya, ndatan *tinəguhantinəṅguhan· deniṅ deśa mvaṅ kāla, *minithyanyaminisyanya pva ikaṅ deśa mvaṅ kāla, minithyanya ... kāla, tan katəmu phalaniṅ cakravr̥ddhi deniṅ apihutaṅhutaṅ. samudrayānakuśalā deśakālārthadarśinaḥ | sthāpayanti tu yāṁ vr̥ddhiṁ sā tatrādhigamaṁ prati || MDhŚ 8.157 hana baṇyāga vruh rivru rivruḥ riṁ lakuniṅ tasik, vruh ta rikaririṁ katəmvanikaṅ lābhaka:təmvaniṁ kalabhakatəmvaniṁ kaṁ labha:katəmvaniṁ kalaba rikaṅrikna deśa, mvaṅ vruh yamvaḥ ya vruḥ ri katəkaniṅtkaniṅtəkaniWe prefer the reading with katəkan, derived from the same verb tuməke that also underlies satuməkana in §135. kalāntaraniṅ hutaṅnya ririṁ satahun, yadyapinyadyapi maṅkanamaṅkana-maṅkana, satəkanya jugapatanya juga:n pasuṅ kalāntara, i pahutaṅanyapahutaṅnya, mon rvaṅ tahun, tigaṅ tahun lavasanya, ririṁ *palayaranpalayaranya, satəkanya pavehanya kalāntaraniṅkalantarani hutaṅnya satahun. yo yasya pratibhūs tiṣṭhed darśanāyeha mānavaḥ | adarśayan sa taṁ tasya prayacchet svadhanād r̥ṇam || MDhŚ 8.158 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅakupaṅakū ririṁ tan *iṅgatanikaṅ vvaṅvoṁBoth reading are equally acceptable. We tentatively prefer that with vvaṅ on the grounds of the unanimous manuscript support for ikaṅ vvaṅ mahutaṅ in div 49. mahutaṅ, hana ta ya, ndan pinintonakənyapinintonakəna, inakunya, meṅətameṅəta-meṅəta ikaṅ maṅaku ririṁ sahutaṅnya, satinarimanya hutaṅ ya sahurənikaṅ maṅaku, tan *pakalāntara vih. prātibhāvyaṁ vr̥thādānam ākṣikaṁ saurikaṁ ca yat | daṇḍaśulkāvaśeṣaṁ ca na putro dātum arhati || MDhŚ 8.159 ikaṅ maṅaku tan iṅgataniṅaṅgataniṅ mahutaṅ, ikaṅ vvaṅ alaṅ-alaṅaṅalaṅ-alaṅi vineveh, hutaṅ totohan, hutaṅ inum-inuman, śeṣaniṅ daṇḍa, śeṣaniṅ ḍaṇḍa, śeṣaniṅ *tukon, ika tan tumusa riṅ anak putuniṅ ahutaṅ śeṣaniṅ tukon ... anak putuniṅ ahutaṅ śeṣaniṁ ḍaṇḍa, śeṣa vlan·, Ika ta kabeḥ, yan matikaṁ mahutaṁ, tan yogya tagihən hanaknya sesaniṁ, sesa vəlyan, ika ta kabeḥ yan mati kaṁ mahutaṁ, tan yogya tagihən anaknya śeṣaniṅ daṇḍa, śeṣa vlyan, ika ta kabeh, yan matīkaṅ mahutaṅ, tan yogya tagihən hanaknya The two alternative ways of reading the last sentence, represented respectively by and , seem equally acceptable. It is remarkable that where reads śeṣaniṅ tukon, seem to reflect śeṣa vlyan in their hyparchetype, while they agree with on reading śeṣaniṅ ḍaṇḍa. There is external textual evidence in Perpusnas L882 (mvah hutaṅ tan kaliliranā deniṅ putra, hutaṅ tan paputra, hutaṅ totohan, śeṣadaṇḍa, hutaṅ tukon, hutaṅ sajə̄ṅ) that might support conjecturing śeṣa ḍaṇḍa in our text. There is also evidence in UBL Or 5037 that tukon and vəlyan were felt to be equivalent in this genre of literature (ana vvaṅ istrī linamar saptapayu sinrahan ikaṅ tukon mati taṅ istrīkaṅ sinrahan tukon vəlyan ika si baṅavan ika tan vaṅsulakna ikaṅ tukon).. pitur eva niyogād yat kuṭumbabharaṇāya ca | kr̥taṁ vā yad r̥ṇaṁ kr̥cchre dadyāt putrasya tat pitā || ikaṅ hutaṅ ginavayakəniṅginavayakən riṁ anak, *kapahayvaniṅ *kuṭumbikuhumbikudumbi donya, ririṁ sḍəṅiṅ bapanyabapanta larā, ika ta hutaṅiṅ anak maṅkana, yogya sahurəniṅ bapanyamaṅkana: bapa:nyamaṅkana: bapanya, pirakniṅ bapabapanya tah panahuranya. darśanaprātibhāvye tu vidhiḥ syāt pūrvacoditaḥ | dānapratibhuvi prete dāyādān api dāpayet || MDhŚ 8.160 ikaikaṁ tiṅkahaniṅ hutaṅtiṅkahniṅ ahutaṁ, kaṅ tan yogyaogya sahurəniṅ anakhanaknya, huvus vinarahakəniṅ hulun, riṅ vvaṅ maṅaku tan iṅgataniṅtaniṁ mahutaṅ, yadyapiyadyapinyan maṅkana, dānapratibhūḥda:napratibhuḥdana:pratibuḥ ṅaranya, yan mati ikaṅ maṅaku, dānapratibhūḥdana:pratibhuḥdana:pr̥tibuḥ, dana:pratibhuḥdanapratibuḥ ṅaranya, maṅaku ririṁ kavijilaniṅ hutaṅ, ikaṅutaṁ Ikaṁpihūtaṁnya, Ikaṁutaṁnikaṅ ikaṅ anaknikaṅhinakunya, Ikaṁ maṅaku maṅkana, konənikaṅ saṅ pradhanamaṅaku dana:pratibhuḥmaṅaku dana:pr̥tibhuḥmaṅaku danapratibuḥ, sumahuranasumahurana hutaṅ ikaṅhutaṁnikaṁhūtaṁnikaṁ senakuniṅsena:kunisenakunni bapanya, anakiṅhanak riṁ maṅaku manahura ya, maṅkanātahmaṅkana ta kadi ṅūni, *sakavitnikaṅ inakuniṅ bapanya panahuranyamanavur anaknya sahinakuniṁ bapaThe variation of reading between and the other two witnesses is unusually significant..This paragraph is transmitted ibn exceedingly corrupt form in all witnesses; we are forced to take recourse to extreme conjectures to obtain a coherent text. adātari punar dātā vijñātaprakr̥tāv r̥ṇam | paścāt pratibhuvi prete parīpset kena hetunā || MDhŚ 8.161 ikaṅ pradhana, mahyun ririṁ kavijilaniṅ pihutaṅnyautaṅnya, ikaṅ mahutaṅ kinavruhankavruhan yanya,h ulih anyāyahulihanya:nulihanya vəkasan, ikaṅ maṅakū mati ya, sādhanaasadanmanasadana:na, konkonakənakokonaknakonkonana ya sahurənsaUra:iron. nirādiṣṭadhanaś cet tu pratibhūḥ syād alaṁdhanaḥ | svadhanād eva tad dadyān nirādiṣṭa iti sthitiḥ || MDhŚ 8.162 ikaṅ vvaṅ tan piraknyasiraknya panahuranya, liṅnya, maṅakvamanaṅakvamaṅakuvva>maṅkana irikaṅ mahutaṅ juga ya, maṅkana pva ya ta, sahurənya ikaṅsahuranyanikaṁ hutaṅ, senakunyasenakusenakumnasenakuna maṅkanātah, sakavit juga ya, nirādiṣṭaniraniṣṭa:niradipta ṅaraniṅ maryādaniṅ maṅakvamaṅakvana yan maṅkana, liṅ bhaṭāra manu,We tentatively accept the extra clause found here in . tuhun tan kinaliliraniṅta kalilirantan kitanaliliran anaknya, *papendahnyapaveṇḍaḥnya sakeṅ dānapratibhūh. mattonmattārtādhyadhīnair bālena sthavireṇa vā | asaṁbaddhakr̥taś caiva vyavahāro na sidhyati || MDhŚ 8.163 ikaṅ vvaṅ mavyavahāramavyavara:mavivahara, hayva juga asahāya vvaṅ tan yogya, lvirnya, avərə̄avro, edanEha:n·, rare dahat, atuha dahat, phalanyamaphalanyamapalanya, tan katutkaturut riṅri āgama, ya *pinakakasornyapinaka:sornyapinasanya. satyā na bhāṣā bhavati yady api syāt pratiṣṭhitā | bahiś ced bhāṣyate dharmān niyatād vyavahārikāt || MDhŚ 8.164 yadyapi tuhvadya:pi tuhudya:pa tva: ujarnikaṁ mattādimatta:ndimantanḍi, tan yogya pagəhakəna saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, apan dudu sakeṅ dharma. yogādhamanavikrītaṁ yogadānapratigraham | yatra vāpy upadhiṁ paśyet tat sarvaṁ vinivartayet || MDhŚ 8.165 nihan lvirniṅlvir dalihaniṅ mahutaṅ, lima kvehnya, keṅətakəna de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, lvirnya, yogāvapanayogavapaṇnayogya:yogavapaṇa:yogavapana, yogavikrayayogavikriya, yogadāna, yogapratigraha, upanidhiupadini. yogāvapanayogavapaṇnayogavapaṇa:yogavapana, ṅa, dravya kinonakən vvitaniṅvitaniṁṅvaṁtanaṅ akrayavikrayaakira, vkasan sinaṅguhnya pavevehpaveḥ iriya. yogavikrayayogavikriyayogavikrya, ṅaṅaranya, dravya kinonakən dvalənkinonalen deniṅ len, vəkasanri vkasan sinaṅguhnya paveveh iriya. yogadānayogga:ḍaṇa:, ṅaṅaranya, dravya patuvava, vkasanri vəkasan sinaṅguhnyapinaṅguḥnya paveveh iriya. yogapratigrahajagrapatigraha, ṅaṅaranya, dravya patuvavapativava, vkasan sinaṅguhnyapinaṅguḥnya upahanupaya. upanidhi, ṅaṅaranya, dravya kəmitan, vkasan sinaṅguhnyapinaṅguḥnya paveveh iriya, ika ta kabeh, saṅ kinilalan dravya maṅkana, konakənakvanaknakvana:knakananakəna ya valuyakənavaluya:ka rikari saṅ makilala de saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka, dharma saṅ maluyakən ikasaṁ valuyaknirasavaluya:kənira. grahītā yadi naṣṭaḥ syāt kuṭumbe ca kr̥to vyayaḥ | dātavyaṁ bāndhavais tat syāt pravibhaktair api svataḥ || MDhŚ 8.166: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. kuṭumbārthe ’dhyadhīno ’pi vyavahāraṁ yam ācaret | svadeśe vā videśe vā taṁ jyāyān na vicālayet || MDhŚ 8.167 ikaṅ vvaṅ *maṅuṅguh-uṅguhvaṅuṅgu-uṅgu, hulun-hulun kunaṅ, *dumvalakəna dravyaniṅ tuhanya, ri svadeśanya kunaṅ, deśari deṣadesaṁ lyan kunaṅ, ndan kapahayvaniṅkapatayvaniṁ *kuṭumbikudumbi donya, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, tan *galakana de saṅdeniṁ saṁ tuhan. balād dattaṁ balād bhuktaṁ balād yac cāpi lekhitam | sarvān balakr̥tān arthān akr̥tān manur abravīt || MDhŚ 8.168: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. trayaḥ parārthe kliśyanti sākṣiṇaḥ pratibhūḥ kulam | catvāras tūpacīyante vipra āḍhyo vaṇiṅ nr̥paḥ || MDhŚ 8.169 təlu lvirniṅlvirnin kasakitan iṅ parārthapararṣa:para:ṣa, ndya ta ya, sākṣikaṁ sakṣi, maṅaku hutaṅ, vəkaniṅvkasaniṁṅvəkasaniṅ ahutaṅ, kunaṅ ikaṅ vr̥ddhi pat kvehnyakuvehnya, lvirnya, vipra, saṅ prabhu, vvaṅ sugih, vaṇijavinija:. anādeyaṁ nādadīta parikṣīṇo ’pi pārthivaḥ | na cādeyaṁ samr̥ddho ’pi sūkṣmam apy artham utsr̥jet || MDhŚ 8.170 yadyapin duhkhaaḍuka:dukaha saṅ prabhu, hayva sira malap dravya tan yukti alapəniraapənira, yadyapin sukhaa sira, sugiha sira, hayva sira tan maṅalapmalap ikaṅ dravya yogya alapənira, mon akəḍika. anādeyasya cādānād ādeyasya ca varjanāt | daurbalyaṁ khyāpyate rājñaḥ sa pretyeha ca naśyati || MDhŚ 8.171 kunaṅ saṅ prabhu yan paṅalappaṅalapa: dravya tan yogyaogya alapənira, durbala sira yan maṅkana, hilaṅ sira maṅkemaṅko, hilaṅ sira dlāhandlaha. svādānād varṇasaṁsargāt durbalānāṁ ca rakṣaṇāt | balaṁ saṁjāyate rājñaḥ sa pretyeha ca vardhate || MDhŚ 8.172 The lemma cited from the stanza here reflects the widely attested variant dharmasaṁsargāt in place of varṇasaṁsargāt in the critically edited text. yan malap sira dravya yogya alapənira, dharmasaṅsarga ṅaranira, karakṣāniṅ deśada:pa: durbala, ika ta kabeh yaya ta nimittaniṅ agə̄ṅ prabhāva saṅ prabhupabhu, vr̥ddhi maṅke sirade sira mvaṅ dlāha. tasmād yama iva svāmī svayaṁ hitvā priyāpriye | varteta yāmyayā vr̥ttyā jitakrodho jitendriyaḥ || MDhŚ 8.173 kadi ulahaUlahan· bhaṭāra yama ulaha saṅ prabhu, hayva hana kasih denira, hayva hanaAyva habha:Ayvana kalalis denira. kady aṅganiṅkadḍihaṅganiṁ bhaṭāra yama, mandaṇḍamanaṇḍamanaṇḍa: riṅ pāpa, maveh svarga riṅ mapuṇya, maṅkana ta sira, dumaṇḍaaduməṇḍataduməṇḍaha duṣṭa, rumakṣaarumakṣatarumakṣaha sādhu, hayvāgə̄ṅ krodha sira, hayva tumut riṅ asihiṅ indriyahasihiṁṅiṁyahasihiṅiṁyaiya sira. yas tv adharmeṇa kāryāṇi mohāt kuryān narādhipaḥ | acirāt taṁ durātmānaṁ vaśe kurvanti śatravaḥ || MDhŚ 8.174 kunaṅ saṅ prabhu, yan gumavayakən ikaṅ adharma, puṅguṅ hetunira, śīghra alahkalah sira deniṅ śatru, maṅkana halanyahalanya yan maṅkanaThe phrasing transmitted by would be suitable only if what follows stated a negative consequence. Cf. §128 halanya yan kalavasan, lələb mvaṅ hinaku de saṅ patuvavan.. kāmakrodhau tu saṁyamya yo ’rthān dharmeṇa paśyati | prajās tam anuvartante samudram iva sindhavaḥ || MDhŚ 8.175 kunaṅ ulaha saṅhulahaniṁ saṁ prabhu, pəgəṅənira ikaṅpgəṁniran tikaṁpgəṁnira:n hikaṁpagəḥnira Ikaṁpgəṁnira hikaṁ hyun, mvaṅ krodha, iṅətakənanira ikaṅika dravya yogya alapənira, ika ta saṅ prabhu maṅkana, tinūt sira deniṅ rāt kabeh Ika: ta sira saṁ prabhū tinut deniṁ rat kabeḥ ika ta saṅ prabhu, tinut sira deniṅ rat kabeh Ika: ta saṁ prabhu maṅkana, tinūt sira denikaṁ ra:t kabeḥ , kadi vvay ahəniṅniṅvyahniṁvya:hniṁvyaniṁThe emendations we make and the entire syllable that we supply are required by the sense of the passage and supported by some parallel expressions, notably Ādiparva (p. 65) inuparəṅga riṅ nadī śuci nirmala, sutīrtha venya mahəniṅ and (p. 195) pinarivr̥tta deniṅ lvah śuci nirmala mahəniṅ venya. lvahlva, milv asin yan təkeṅ tasik. yaḥ sādhayantaṁ chandena vedayed dhanikaṁ nr̥pe | sa rājñā tac caturbhāgaṁ dāpyas tasya ca tad dhanam || MDhŚ 8.176 ikaṅ vvaṅ kinon managih-nagih-nagiha:, kədə̄nya tikaṅhikaṁ mahutaṅ, mijilvijil ikaṅ pihutaṅiṁ kapihutaṁ denya, tan sakaharəpnikaṅhanakaR̥pisaṁAna:kahaR̥pisana:hanakahaR̥pisaṁhanakahaR̥pisa kumonyatumonya, ikaṅ kinonkon maṅkana, ḍaṇḍan yayogya daṇḍaḍaṇḍa yogya de saṅ prabhu, saparapatanikaṅsapapa:nikaṁsata:panThe transmission has become corrupt due to interference from sentences like sapāpaniṅ maliṅ kapaṅguh denira (§42). In §20 we have saparapatan clearly supported by all witnesses, though it is imaginable that our author actually wrote sapapātanikaṅ here. tinagihakənya daṇḍanya, ikaṅ pihutaṅ senalapnya, vehakənanyavehakən ririṁ saṅ makon, təhər tantat:hərn upahanahapahana:upalana. karmaṇāpi samaṁ kuryād dhanikāyādhamarṇikaḥ | samo ’vakr̥ṣṭajātis tu dadyāc chreyāṁs tu tac chanaiḥ || MDhŚ 8.177 ikaṅ mahutaṅ paḍa janmanya lavan ikaṅ pradhana, ṅuni-ṅuni yan sora, dadya ya hulunadanya:huluna:dadyayanuluna de saṅ pahutaṅan, kunaṅ yanyaṁ ləvih janmanya, ikaṅ ahutaṅ, sakeṅsaṅke pradhana, yatnāṅantyakəna tan panagihtagiḥOur provisional conjecture helps solve the problem that tagih can hardly stand as a noun. manahura, ikaṅharikaṁhirikaṁikaṁkəna pradhana, yan sor janmanya. anena vidhinā rājā mitho vivadatāṁ nr̥ṇām | sākṣipratyayasiddhāni kāryāṇi samatāṁ nayet || MDhŚ 8.178 ikaṅ mavyavahāravyavaharavyavavaraCf. §3 for another case of omission of the expected prefix. kālih, sampun teka iniṅət-iṅəthiṅiṅət:hiṅət de saṅ prāgvivākasaṁ saṁ pragivaka, makanimitta kahiḍəpaniṅkaIḍpappaḍpaniṁkahidəpani varah-varahniṅvaravaraḥ sākṣi, pəgatakənanira ya, makasādhanaṅ-sadana-sḍana:ṅ āgama, daṇḍa yathāparādhīḍaṇḍayata:paraḍiḍaṇḍasataparadiCf. yathāparādha in .. iti sabhācara:-The appearance of the word sabhā in the next sentence supports our conjecture. The similarity of the akṣaras sa to ca and bha to ra seems to underlie an error shared here by all mss.carita.
Topic of deposits tan pəgat ikaṅ paṅidəpakəna ləḥ sabhā sakeṅ sunya ika paridəpa:L̥ḥkna saba sakeṁ sunya Ika: tan pgət:hikaṁ paṅiḍəpakna:L̥ḥ śabha sakeṁ sunya Ika: paṅidəpakəna ləḥ saba sakiṁ sunya ika kulaje vr̥ttasaṁpanne dharmajñe satyavādini | mahāpakṣe dhaniny ārye nikṣepaṁ nikṣiped budhaḥ || MDhŚ 8.179 ika Ikaṁ saṅ prajña maməkasakənamamkasaṇa: patuvavamatuvava riṅ yogya, vvaṅ akavaṅśan kajanmanya vvaṁṅakajanmanya vvaṅakajadmanya vvaṅa:kajanmanya In Ślokāntara 56, kulaja is glossed ikaṅ vvaṅ yan aluhur kulanya. , vvaṅ satyavacana, vvaṅpaṅ akveh kadaṅnya, vvaṅ sugih, vvaṅ sādhu. yo yathā nikṣiped dhaste yam arthaṁ yasya mānavaḥ | sa tathaiva grahītavyo yathā dāyas tathā grahaḥ || MDhŚ 8.180 ikaṅ vvaṅ matuvava dravya, ikaṅ dravya patuvavahavya:, Ikaṁ dr̥vya patuva:vadr̥vya: matuva:va, i taṅanikaṅ patuvavanpatuvavamatuva:van·, ikaṅ atuvavaatuvavan· dravya, ya umalapUmalapi ikaṅ dravya patuvava, i taṅanikaṅ patuvavanIka:taṅanikaṁ patuvavvan·I taṅanikaṁ matuva:van·, mataṅnyan maṅkana, ikaṅ atuvava ya umalapaUpalapa ya ri taṅanikaṅ patuvavan. yo nikṣepaṁ yācyamāno nikṣeptur na prayacchati | sa yācyaḥ prāḍvivākena tan nikṣeptur asaṁnidhau || MDhŚ 8.181 ikaṅ ika patuvava, pininta ya denikaṅ matuvavapatuvava, tan vinehakən ya ikaṅ patuvava, ikaṅ patuvavanpatuvava maṅkana, konən ya mehakəna irikaṅIkaṁ patuvava, ririṁ harəpnya de saṅ prāgvivāka. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ dravya patuvava, sthāpyaḥsthupyaḥ, inənah i taṅanikaṅ patuvavanpatūvava, inuntalakəninuntalakəna kunaṅ, səgəh pamitrānuṅpamitra:nu hetu, hanan pasākṣi, ri *parva-rvan kunaṅkinaṁ, hanan ... kunaṅ ri parvan-rvan kunaṁ, hanan pasaksi, ikaṅ patuvava maṅkana, nikṣepaṇadikṣepa ṅaranya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ patuvava tinarimavinarima: ri parva-rvanr:var:va:parvarva:See the extensive dittography in the next section, where the reiterated readings of this passage confirm our emendation., sopāṅśuḥsomaṅguḥ, avuniAhuniṁavani, avəḍiavəda kavruhana, avibhāvyaḥ, tan kinavruhan lvirnya apan vinuṅkusvinuṅkas·, ikaṅ patuvava maṅkana, upanidhiUpanindiUpaninḍi ṅaranyaṅa. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. dravya kaliliran tinuvavakən ri parva-rvan dravya ... ri parva-rvan riṁ par:var:va:, sopaṅguḥ Ahuni, Avdi kavruhanya, tan kinavruhan· lvirnya, hapan kinuṅkus·, Ikaṁ patuvava maṅkana:, Upanindi, ṅa || dr̥vya: kalilirra:n tinuvavakən· ri par:var:van· riṁ parvarvan·, sapaṅśuḥ, Avani, Avḍi kavruhana:, Avibhavanivya, tan kina§vruhan lvirnya, hapan vinuṅkus·, Ikaṁ patuvava maṅkana:, Upaninḍi ṅaranya | druvye kaliliran tinuvavakən· riṁ parvarvan· An ancestor of and has skipped back from ri parva-rvan to the same words in the preceding section, leading to wholesale repetition of an extensive passage. , sopāṅśuḥ, avibhāvyaḥAvibavya, tan katon rūpanya, inalapInalapaIvnalapa ri parva-rvanriṁ rvarvan· de saṅ matuvava, upanidhiUpadiniUpadiniṁ ṅaraniṅ patuvava maṅkana muvah. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ dravya salviranya, vinəkasakən ririṁ taṅaniṅ paṇḍe, ikaṅ dravyaniṅ hulunhulan gavenəngavekəngavehakən bhūṣaṇa, denta, maṅkana liṅnyanlvirnyan patuvava, ikaṅ patuvava maṅkana, nyāsa ṅaranya liṅ saṅ paṇḍita. sākṣyabhāve praṇidhibhir vayorūpasamanvitaiḥ | apadeśaiś ca saṁnyasya hiraṇyaṁ tasya tattvataḥ || sa yadi pratipadyeta yathānyastaṁ yathākr̥tam | na tatra vidyate kiṁ cid yat parair abhiyujyate || teṣāṁ na dadyād yadi tu tad dhiraṇyaṁ yathāvidhi | ubhau nigr̥hya dāpyaḥ syād iti dharmasya dhāraṇā || MDhŚ 8.182-184: Only the last of these three stanzas appears to be paraphrased in our text. ikaṅ paṇḍepandeniṁ *vinaluy-valuyanvinaluy·, valuya:nvinaluy·avaluyan kinon aṅhuvusa ikaṅhaṅuhusanika:ṁkaṅuvusa, Ikaṁaṅuvuḥsaikaṅ nyāsa, masamayāta ya, təka piṅtigapintiga, huvus pva ya ginavenya, tatan vinehakənyavinehakəna, ikaṅ paṇḍe maṅkana, yogya daṇḍananda, ikaṅ dravya valuyakəna ya, mvaṅmvaḥ tan vehən upahanupahən·hupahən·, daṇḍanya, ikaṅ dravya kinonakən riṅ paṇḍe, tan pamənaṅi ta kāryanyakaryya, halāta pvahala:pvaAlahatamva:ala ta tapva gavenyagavay·nyagavayanya, tatan upahən ya,tan upahən ya, daṇḍan taḍaṇḍa ya, samūlyanikaṅ dravya kinonakən daṇḍaanyama:kaḍaṇḍanya, varṇa-varla-vəratnya, panambəhaniṅpanambahaniṁ daṇḍanya.Conjecture savarṇa-vəratnya? No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vvaṅ manarima patuvavan vadivədi, tatan vinehakənyavinehakənanya:vinehakəna irikaṅ kinonakənkinokən· vehakəna, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, daṇḍanḍaṇḍa samūlyanikaṅ-niṁ patuvava, ləvihanaL̥vihaknaThe form ləvihana was also used in §38. sayogya kalāntaranyakanlantaranyakalantarahanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vaṇigjana, adval bhāṇḍabaṇḍabanda irikaṅ deśairika sesa, tan kinonakən de saṅ *pamasaṅpamacan·pama:san·, ikaṅIka: taika taṁ maṅkana, tanta daṇḍanḍaṇḍa ta ya, salābhanikaṅ mareṅ deśa kinonakən parananyaparanya, vijilakənanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ bhāṇḍa kinədə̄kinəda deniṅ aṅalap, hana vinuni, avədi karuṅvanakaruṅuna, hana ta səgəhtgəs mitranya hetunya inalaphetunyan hinalap·, ika taṅIkaṁ taṁikaṁ taṅ ikaṁ taṁ patuvava bhāṇḍa maṅkana, yeka bandha ṅaranya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ kāla yogya padvalakənapadvalana:padvalaṇa: bhāṇḍa irikaṅrikaṁ deśa, kunaṅ ikaṅ bhāṇḍa makanimitta sepnya ri kāla padvalanyapadvalana:, salābhanikaṅsalabhahika:ṅ amənaṅi kāla, ya daṇḍanikaṅ anarimaamna:rima: bhāṇḍāḥvandaḥ, an sep ri kāla padvalanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vvaṅ tan pamvit i saṅ madravya yan padvalakənapadvalakənaṁ bhāṇḍa, irikaṅ baṇijabanigjabanigḍa maṅkana, daṇḍan ya salābhanikaṅ amvit, i tuhanyantuhunyantuhunya padvala bhāṇḍa, vijilakənanya tavijilaknanyanta sakvehnikaṅ pirak kapaṅanpiraka:paṅan denyandenya ri kalanyan padvalaEmend padval? bhāṇḍa. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vvaṅ manuduhakənmanuduhan ikaṅ strīhistri, rare dahat, atuhatuva dahat, anāśrayaApan aśraya i saṅ puhavaṅ, ika ta kabeh, tan hanatatanana kavənaṅnyāgavekavnaṁnya gavekavnanya:gave sambyavahāra, ika ta vvaṅ manuduhakən, ya juga gumavayakəna gavenikaṅ tinuduhakənya i saṅ puhavaṅ, ṅaraniṅṅarani vvaṅ maṅkana, yeka kr̥tyatara ṅaranya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose, although MDhŚ 8.182 shares some keywords. ikaṅ mas patuvava, yanyen vinehakən rii saṅ matuvavapatuvava, yadyapin matya ikaṅ sākṣi, ikaṅhika praṇidhisākṣipradinidisakṣipr̥dininsakṣi, praṇidhisākṣi ṅaranya, ikaṅ vruh yan patuvava, sambhava yanana, sadva ta ya, yayan sākṣyaniṅ aveh patuvavaavevatuvava ika. nikṣepopanidhī nityaṁ na deyau pratyanantare | naśyato vinipāte tāv anipāte tv anāśinau || MDhŚ 8.185 ikaṅ nikṣepa mvaṅvvaṁ upanidhi, hayva vinehakən iṅ anaknya saṅ matuvavapatuvava, halanya yan vinehakənvinehakna:, hilaṅika ikaṅ patuvava, yan mati anaknikaṅpatəhakənikaṁmatəhanaknikaṁ patuvava. təka pva bapanya ikaṅ atuvava ṅūni, aminta patuvavanya, həlyananahəlyanlyaniəlyani ikaṅ patuvava huvus kaveh ri anaknya, nahan ta halanya. kunaṅ yan ahurip ikaṅtikaṁ pratyantarapr̥tantara, tan hilaṅ ikaṅ nikṣepopanidhi yan maṅkana-niṁ nəmana. Kuṭāra-Mānava 209: riṅ voṅ tini(ti)pan, yen mati kaṅ atitip tan pakaki, tan panini, tan pabapa, tan pababu, tan panak-anak, tan pakaponakan, tan anarva sanak amisan, amiṅro, iku (ikaṅ) iṅaran pratyantara kabeh tan hana, tan ulihakna riṅ dr̥vya, patitip deniṅ tinitipan, yen mati kaṅ tinitipan nora hilaṅ ikaṅ dr̥veniṅ pratyantara, apan lagi ahurip kaṅ atitip tan panak-anak ikā, vehən dr̥ve patitip ikā deniṅ anakiṅ tinitipan riṅ pratyantara iṅkana (J would read: ikā, yen maṅkana) tan saṅgratana denira saṅ amava bhūmi dene anakiṅ tinitipan aṅulihakən iṅ titipan, tan ucapən kadaṅ-varganiṅ tinitipan, tan vənaṅ tan paṅulihakna titipan. svayam eva tu yo dadyān mr̥tasya pratyanantare | na sa rājñābhiyoktavyo na nikṣeptuś ca bandhubhiḥ || MDhŚ 8.186: var.: tu yau kunaṅ yan mati ikaṅ atuvavamatuvava, vehakəna ikaṅ patuvava ri anaknikaṅ matuvava, ika taṅhikaṁIka:ṁ patuvava maṅkana, tan kilalanhilala:na:kilana de saṅ prabhu, mvaṅvvaṁvaṁ sānaknikaṅ atuvava, tan pakilalaapakilanaha iriya. acchalenaiva cānvicchet tam arthaṁ prītipūrvakam | vicārya tasya vā vr̥ttaṁ sāmnaiva parisādhayet || MDhŚ 8.187 ikaṅ amintaamanta (aminta?)The typist of seems to have found amanta in the lontar he was working with, and to have intuited the correct reading. patuvava, mojaranakmojarranakmojar hanakEmend mojarakən? mojarakəna? mojarenak? mojarāmbək? or simply mojara? duga-dugadugaduta, hayva budi-budi, umucap ikaṅ dravya salviraniṅsalviriṁ patuvava, maṅkana deniṅ sumādhya vijilanyavijalanyaThe correction in seems to have been made by a second hand.. nikṣepeṣv eṣa sarveṣu vidhiḥ syāt parisādhane | samudre nāpnuyāt kiṁ cid yadi tasmān na saṁharet || MDhŚ 8.188 hanakənekaṅhanaknikaṁAnaknika:ṁ vidhivinidividini ri kapalakvaniṅ patuvava, saha cirinya ṅūnicirinya ta ṅuni, alapən ya dedenya saṅ matuvava, kunaṅ yanjuga hilaṅ cirinya, hayvenalap ikaṅhayvanalap hikaṁayvenalapənkaṁ patuvava. caurair hr̥taṁ jalenoḍham agninā dagdham eva ca | na dadyād yadi tasmāt sa na saṁharati kiṁ cana || MDhŚ 8.189 ikaṅ dravya patuvava, yan inalapiṅhilaṁ ba hiṅalapiṁinalapi maliṅ, kaləbur iṅ bañu lvah ajəro kahilikeliriṁvekaL̥buriṁ bañu lvahajro kali, katunvan kunaṅkatunvana:, maṅkana pva kāraṇanyakavitnya hilaṅ, tan paṅəlyananamaṅəlyanana: saṅ patuvavantinuvavan·matuvavan maṅkana, saṅ matuvavapatuvava: tan pamalampaha əlyanmalampaha həlyan·pamalampaṅəlyan·, yan maṅkana kramanya. nikṣepasyāpahartāram anikṣeptāram eva ca | | sarvair upāyair anvicchec chapathaiś caiva vaidikaiḥ || MDhŚ 8.190: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. yo nikṣepaṁ nārpayati yaś cānikṣipya yācate | tāv ubhau cauravac chāsyau dāpyau vā tatsamaṁ damam || MDhŚ 8.191: It seems our author read dāpyau tāvat samaṁ damam (found in Olivelle's BKt5). ikaṅvvaṁ tan paveh yan pinalakvan patuvava, ikaṅ akilalaahila:la tanhan atuvava, ika taṅta voṁ maṅkana kālih, yogya daṇḍan, apan paḍa kalavan maliṅnyamya coraḥ, yogya ḍaṇḍaThe reading cannot be made sense of, but it is remarkable for containing a trace of cauravac in the underlying Sanskrit stanza. It is possible that the reading we adopt here is a rationalization of an original reading with cora., ma, su, 43, mā, 2ṅa, dadi samūlyamūlya-nikaṅ patuvava daṇḍanikaṅ-nika:kaṅ akilala, apan tan patuvavamatuvava. nikṣepasyāpahartāraṁ tatsamaṁ dāpayed damam | tathopanidhihartāram aviśeṣeṇa pārthivaḥ || MDhŚ 8.192 ikaṅ patuvavamatuvava nikṣepa, yatanyata yogya katəṅətanya, mvaṅ kilalanya, paḍa daṇḍanyapaḍaṇḍanya kālih de saṅ prabhu, maṅkana ikaṅ patuvava upanidhi, yan salahyen sala katəṅətanya, mvaṅ kilalanyakakilalanya, tan palen atahpale,The agreement between and on the omission of the undoubtedly required n after pale must imply a genetic relationship between the two. daṇḍanya de saṅ prabhu. upadhābhiś ca yaḥ kaś cit paradravyaṁ haren naraḥ | sasahāyaḥ sa hantavyaḥ prakāśaṁ vividhair vadhaiḥ || MDhŚ 8.193 salviraniṅ vvaṅ maleśya, anAnahapan paṅalapa dravyaniṅdr̥veniṁṅniṁvyaniṁdrəvyaniṁ lyanlen, yogyayegya patyana ya, prakāśakəna doṣanya. nikṣepo yaḥ kr̥to yena yāvāṁś ca kulasaṁnidhau | tāvān eva sa vijñeyo vibruvan daṇḍam arhati || MDhŚ 8.194 sakveh salviranikaṁ patuvava, sinākṣyakən ṅūni, ya tikaika kavruhanavruha:na, alapən dehalapəne saṅ matuvavapatuvava:, yapvanyapvanyayapvanyan salah pavehnya, aṅuraṅi kunaṅkuna, yapvan salah palakvan, aṅləvihikaL̥vihialəvihi kunaṅ, yogya daṇḍanḍəṇḍadəndan salah siki, sapaṅuraṅnyasapaṅuraṅanya daṇḍanya, sapaṅləvihnyasapaṅləvihesapalviḥnya daṇḍanya, ikaṅ kuraṅ-ləvihpaṅləviḥ-paL̥viḥ-niṅ patuvava ṅūni, sapaṅavruhniṅsapaṅavruniṁsapanaṅavruḥniṁsapaṅavruhnya ṅuni, sapaṅavruḥ sākṣi pituhun saṅ prāgvivākapragivaka. mitho dāyaḥ kr̥to yena gr̥hīto mitha eva vā | mitha eva pradātavyo yathā dāyas tathā grahaḥ || MDhŚ 8.195: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. nikṣiptasya dhanasyaivaṁ prītyopanihitasya ca | rājā vinirṇayaṁ kuryād akṣiṇvan nyāsadhāriṇam || MDhŚ 8.196 ikaṅṅsakaṅ patuvava nikṣepa, mvaṅ patuvava pamitran, kapagəhakəna saṅ prabhu yuktinya, ikaṅ patuvava nyāsa, maṅkanātah, pagəhakənanira kramanya. iti nikṣepa-carita.
Topic of Sale without Ownership vikrīṇīte parasya svaṁ yo ’svāmī svāmyasaṁmataḥ | na taṁ nayeta sākṣyaṁ tu stenam astenamāninam || MDhŚ 8.197 hana vvaṅteka vaṁ advalhadol· tan dravyanya, ika tataṁ maṅkana, yadyastu tanyadyastutyanan maliṅa liṅnyaliṅanya, daməliṅ maliṅḍaṇḍa maliṁḍamələdamaliṁ jugeka, daṇḍa sadaṇḍaniṁ maliṅ, ikaṅ dravya dinvalnyadinol· vijilakənanya, tan pametakənapamehakna sākṣi. avahāryo bhavec caiṣa sānvayaḥ ṣaṭśataṁ damam | niranvayo ’napasaraḥ prāptaḥ syāc caurakilbiṣam || MDhŚ 8.198: The lemma in the Svayambhu mss. suggest that our author may have read ṣaḍgataṁ, but the paraphrase suggests otherwise. kunaṅ yan sānvayasadvaya:, hana nimittanyannimitanyamimita§nya:nniṁmitanyaThe reading is followed by (nimitanya?), presumably a suggestion by the typist. padvalpadol·, daṇḍan yadaṇḍa ya, ṣaṭśatamśadgata:msadgata:m damam, nəm atusnmaṁṅatus paṇa, ma, su, 1, mā, 14, təkanya pirak, mvaṅ vijilakəna sadinvalnyadinvalnya vijilaknavijilakəna dinvalnya, yapvanyapan tan panimitta, tan vruh ririṁ paranyaparananya, sadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ daṇḍaanyadandanya Eyeskip in from daṇḍaanya here to §188., ma, su, 3, mā, 2, mvaṅ vijilakəna sadravya dinvalnyat:hər ṅavijilakən kaṁ dinolmvaṁ vijilikna sadr̥vya dinolnya. asvāminā kr̥to yas tu dāyo vikraya eva vā | akr̥taḥ sa tu vijñeyo vyavahāre yathā sthitiḥ || MDhŚ 8.199 ikaṅ dravya dinvalniṅdinol· deniṁ asvāmi, ika ta dinvalnya, ika ta paməlīriya, turuṅ dval ika, turuṅ vinəli ika, apan aṅheraṅhe vyavahāra yukti gatinya. anena vidhinā śāsyaḥ kurvann asvāmivikriyam | ajñānāj jñānapūrvaṁ tu cauravad vadham arhati || Olivelle 2005: “Additional verse in Be1 Be3 Bo SCa Ho NKt4 Lo2 TMd4 Ox2 Tr1 Tr2 Wa [Jolly Nd N Gr] Nā Nd Rc Mandlik … Dave KSS; placed after 198 in Lal OOr NPu1 Pu2 Pu3 Pu4 GMd1 TMd3 GMy MTr4 MTr6; cited by Lakṣ 12.352.” yan apuṅguṅ nimittanikiṅ adval tan dravyanya, nahan ta kavidhyaniṅkavidya:ni daṇḍanya, yapvan yapvan tan vruh ririṅ tan dravyanya, ika tavaṁ maṅkana, takvananatakvanana, takvanana rumuhun, i nimittanyannimitanya:nnimitanya padravya yapadr̥vyanya. saṁbhogo yatra dr̥śyate na dr̥śyetāgamaḥ kva cit | āgamaḥ kāraṇaṁ tatra na saṁbhoga iti sthitiḥ || MDhŚ 8.200: Though there is a global correspondence of topic, the Old Javanese cannot be said to paraphrase the Sanskrit except in the loosest possible way. ndya paṅavruhanya ririṁ tuhu dravyanya, yan hulun-hulun katəmukaṅtəmu, gəgvananagəgvanataṁna taṅanya, yan hənaṅ tuhuhū ika, yan sapinya katəmu, yan ariṅ iriyaya: tuhu ika talyanana ikaṅ sapi yan atutūtyan atutut· hikaṁ sa:piikaṁ sapi yan yan atututan ariṅ ... yan atututIt seems that two variant ways of formulating this part of the section have been conflated in transmission. We hypothetically reconstruct the two variants as follows: (1) yan ariṅ iriya tuhu ika, (2) talyanana ikaṅ sapi, yan atutut tuhu ika., yanyanan savahnya katəmuatəmu, takvananatakvana i lvanyana:halvanvaI lva:nya, ya patut tuhu hika:Note the addition in ., mvaṅ isinyaiminya, yansaya patut tuhu ika, yan umahnya katəmu, takvanana ḍəpanikaṅḍpanya hika:dəpanya ikaṁ umah, yanya patutpva:tutpvatut tuhu ika. vikrayād yo dhanaṁ kiṁ cid gr̥hṇīyat kulasaṁnidhau | krayeṇa sa viśuddhaṁ hi nyāyato labhate dhanam || MDhŚ 8.201 deya saṅ vruh yan panəmu-nəmu dravya, riṅ savah, riṅ tambak, riṅ pāməṅ-aməṅan, riṅ ləmah, pirəṅvakəna riṅ vvaṅ akveh, kaprakāśa ta ya. atha mūlam anāhāryaṁ prakāśakrayaśodhitaḥ | adaṇḍyo mucyate rājñā nāṣṭiko labhate dhanam || MDhŚ 8.202 kinavruhan ta ya denikaṅdeniṁkaṁ huvus abhyāsa rikaṅ dravya, mvaṅ kadaṅ, *hatur-tataṅganikaṅtataṅganiṁkaṁ kahilaṅankahilaṅan , tuhu ikaṅhika: dravyanya, alapənya yan maṅkana, irikaṅ dravyadr̥vya yan maṅkana:, tinəmunya, tan doṣaa, phalanya pinrakāśakənpinraka:ṣatka:n·pinraka:sanak·. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. huvus nimittanikaṅ dravyan prasiddha, takvanana ikatika:, katəmvanikaṅkatəmva tikaṁ dravya, de saṅ prāgvivāka, i saṅkanikaṅ dravya katəmukatəmva denya, nimittanya madravya ya, yathākramayatakramayata:krama ta denira takvan. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. huvusni saṅkanikaṅ-nikaṁkaṭa:-nikaṁka dravya, kapva vinarahakənvinarahan· de saṅ katəmvaniṅ dravya, hr̥tən ikaṅ dravya, kədə̄nkḍə de saṅ prāgvivāka, takvanana tattvanikaṅtakvana:na, tatvana:na tatvanikaṁ dravya, irikaṅ katəmvanya, liṅanira, tuduhakəna ta saṅkanikaṅ dravya, təka ri kita, maṅkana liṅa saṅ prāgvivāka. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. yapvan panuduhakənpatuduhakan ya ikatika: saṅkanikaṅ dravyan təkeriya, tan hana doṣa iriya, tuhun kahilaṅan paməlipamliya, yapvan tan manuduhakən, sadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ daṇḍanya, mvaṅ kahilaṅan paməlinya, saṅ madravya pūrvaka madravya yamadr̥vya:yan·. saṁ madr̥vya pūrvva madr̥vya:ya:n· || 0 || niṣṭenū bayaṁ* hadityaṁ*, krodaṁ* mpradana haṣṭataḥ, valatkaR̥ṁ* hina nugr̥m·, niṣṭeka:nəmva yuktinaṁ* || ka, hana ta vaṁ havutaṅa:, riṁṅ kaṁ pradana:, pūrvaka haṅavya: pūrvvakaṁ madr̥vya:yan· || In a manner that seems analogous to what happens in §121, here repeats a part of the text and inserts an interpolation containing a garbled (and unidentified) Sanskrit stanza. Our emendation of unanimously transmitted madr̥vya:yan· (twice in ) to madravya ya is supported by §192 nimittanya madravya ya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vvaṅ aməli salviraniṅ dravya, vavaṅ pinintonakən iṅ vvaṅ akveh, śuddhasudḍi ikaṅ maməli yan maṅkana, ikaṅ dravya yukti kavəlyan ika denya. abhakṣyam atha vāpeyaṁ vaiśyādīn bhakṣayan dvijān | jaghanyamadhyamotkr̥ṣṭadaṇḍān arhed yathākramam || Interpolated after MDh 8.205. Attributed to Manu by Aparārka ad YDh 2.232–3. ikaṅ śūdra akon amaṅanapaṅan tan yogya paṅanənpaṅanan·, aṅinumAṅinūma tan yogya inumən, i saṅ brāhmaṇa, veśya, yogya ikaṅ śūdra daṇḍan riṅ ma, mā, 12, ku, 1, mvaṅ riṅ ma, su, 1, mā, 9, mvaṅ riṅ ma, su, 3, mā, 2, tumutana varṇakrama. paṇāḥ śūdre bhaved daṇḍaś catuṣpañcāśad eva tu | grasitāraḥ svayaṁ kāryā rājñā nirviṣayās tu te || Interpolated after MDh 8.205. Attributed to Manu by Aparārka ad YDh 2.232–3. kunaṅ yan śūdra, kinoniṅ śūdra, amaṅan aṅinumaaṅinvama:, tan yogya, daṇḍan paṇa, 54, *pandaṇḍeriyapaṁḍaṇḍa:riya, paṁḍaṇḍa:riya:,paḍaṇḍariya mā, 2, ku, 2ṅa, hana pvasupva śūdra mulat tan pohut, iṅgatakəna paravaśan de saṅ prabhu. gokumārīṁ devapaśum ukṣāṇam r̥ṣabhaṁ tathā | vāhayan sāhasaṁ pūrvaṁ prāpnuyād uttamaṁ vadhe || Interpolated after MDh 8.205. Attributed to Manu by Aparārka on YDh 2.226 and by Lakṣmīdhara in KKT. ikaṅ vvaṅ akon aṅhiranaaṅiriṁṅa irikaṅhirika: ləmbu kanyā, ləmbu *kaṇḍaṅan, ləmbu saṅ hyaṅ, pañjalu kunaṅ, daṇḍan ya riṅ, ma, mā, 12, ku, 11, 2, kū1, 2, ku, kunaṅ yanyen mati ikaṁ ləmbu denya, ḍaṇḍan ya, ma, su, 3, mā, 2, ḍaṇḍanya. nānyad anyena saṁsr̥ṣṭaṁ rūpaṁ vikrayam arhati | na sāvadyaṁ na ca nyūnaṁ na dūre na tirohitam || MDhŚ 8.203: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. anyāṁ ced darśayitvānyā voḍhuḥ kanyā pradīyate | ubhe ta ekaśulkena vahed ity abravīn manuḥ || MDhŚ 8.204 ikaṅ vvaṅ amintonakən kanyā, donyandyonyan· səḍaṅsḍəṁ tinonton, vinvatanvidvata vəlyan, vinaraṅ pva ya, aveh ta ya kanyā len, ikiIka: vərəh-vərəh, ya aṅalapahaṅala karva, irikaṅ kanyā, ikaṅ paməli, karvanana kaṅ kanyā, vəlivḍi pisan gatinya, maṅkana liṅ bhaṭāra manu ṅūnin pavarah i bhagavān bhr̥gu. nonmattāyā na kuṣṭhinyā na ca yā spr̥ṣṭamaithunā | pūrvaṁ doṣān abhikhyāpyapradātā daṇḍam arhati || MDhŚ 8.205: Our text gives no paraphrase for the third stanza grouped in this section. iti asvāmicarita.
Topic of Nondelivery of Gifts r̥tvig yadi vr̥to yajñe svakarma parihāpayet | tasya karmānurūpeṇa deyo ’ṁśaḥ sahakartr̥bhiḥ || dakṣiṇāsu ca dattāsu svakarma parihāpayan | kr̥tsnam eva labhetāṁśam anyenaiva ca kārayet || MDhŚ 8.206–207 saṅ brāhmaṇa kinon ta ayajña, tātan iṅuvusakənira tikaṅ yajña, huvus taUvusha sira vinehan dakṣiṇā, mvaṅ upakalpanira, sayogyaniṅ karmanira ta deniṅ aveh, tātan ginavenira tikaṅ yajña, valuyakənanira tikaṅ dakṣiṇā, sakvehniṅsakehiṁ tinaṅgapira ri saṅ yajamāna, saṅ yajamāna ametahametiṁ viku lenvikuniṁ len·, tumulusakəna tikaṅhikaṁ kārya.This section paraphrases two stanzas at once. The words huvus ta sira vinehan dakṣiṇā which correspond to MDh 207a dakṣiṇāsu ca dattāsu come before the words mvaṅ upakalpanira, sayogyaniṅ karmanira ta deniṅ aveh corresponding to MDh 206cd tasya karmānurūpeṇa deyo ’ṁśaḥ sahakartr̥bhiḥ. And neither of the two available witnesses closes the rendering of the first stanza with the usual final punctuation. yasmin karmaṇi yās tu syur uktāḥ pratyaṅgadakṣiṇāḥ | sa eva tā ādidīta bhajeran sarva eva vā || MDhŚ 8.208 ikaṅ dakṣiṇā humaḍaṅ i kālaniṅ yajña, *sasambhavanira saṅ dakṣiṇānana, yathākrama de saṅ yajamāna an dakṣiṇānana, saṅ viku kunaṅ manava imana Imanavi rovaṅira. rathaṁ hareta cādhvaryur brahmādhāne ca vājinam | hotā vāpi hared aśvam udgātā cāpy anaḥ kraye || MDhŚ 8.209 saṅ adhvaryuhḍvaryyaḥ, aṅalapa dakṣiṇā ratha, saṅ brahmādhānabrahma:ṇa:brahmaṇa:, aṅalapa dakṣiṇā liman, saṅ hotā, aṅalapa dakṣiṇā kuda, saṅ udgātāUṅgata:huṅgata:, aṅalapa ratha kuda liman. saṅ brāhmaṇa maṅaji yajuḥvedayajuḥdevaIn Sanskrit, the normal spelling of the word is yajurveda., adhvaryuh ṅaranira, saṅ maṅaji ātharvaṇaArtha:pvana:ha:rṭa:vaṇa:, brahmādhānabrahma:danabrahma:dana: ṅaranira, saṅsa maṅaji r̥gvedaR̥sveḍa, saṅ hotā ṅaranira, saṅ maṅaji sāmavedasamadeva, saṅ udgātāUṅgatahuṅgaha: ṅaranira, maṅkana kramaniṅ adum dakṣiṇā. sarveṣām ardhino mukhyās tadardhenārdhino ’pare | tr̥tīyinas tr̥tīyāṁśāś caturthāṁśās tu pādinaḥ || MDhŚ 8.210 saṅ brāhmaṇa mukhyaniṅ mayajña, dakṣiṇānana, ma, su, 1, saṅsī kapiṅrvaniṅ luṅguh, dakṣiṇānana, ma, mā, 12, saṅ kapiṅtiganiṅ luṅguh, dakṣiṇānana, ma, mā, 8, saṅ kapiṅpatniṅ luṅguh, dakṣiṇānana, ma, mā, 3, ka, maṅkana kramanyakramaniṁ, liṅ bhaṭāra manu. saṁbhūya svāni karmāṇi kurvadbhir iha mānavaiḥ | anena vidhiyogena kartavyāṁśaprakalpanā || MDhŚ 8.211 kadumaniṅ lābha ulihniṅhuliniṁ kinabehan, gavayakəna de saṅ maṅabehi karma, makasādhanamaka:sḍana: pavarah saṅ hyaṅ āgama, maranparan tan patəmahan vyavahāra. dharmārthaṁ yena dattaṁ syāt kasmai cid yācate dhanam | paścāc ca na tathā tat syān na deyaṁ tasya tad bhavet || MDhŚ 8.212 ikaṅ vvaṅ aveh dravyanya, asiṅ pavevehanyapaveḥvehanya, dharma ta donyadenya veh pūrvaka, ri vəkasan pinalakunya ta ya pavevehnyapaveḥveḥnya, tan yogya ikaṅ dravya maṅkana kilalanən, tanta:r vehanavehna ikaṅ akilalahikilala:, ikaṅ vinehan makadravya ya. yadi saṁsādhayet tat tu darpāl lobhena vā punaḥ | rājñā dāpyaḥ suvarṇaṁ syāt tasya steyasya niṣkr̥tiḥ || MDhŚ 8.213 maṅədvakənmaṅadvakən· pva yāmalaku pavevehnyapaveḥnya, makanimitta lobhanya, mūrkhanya, mvaṅ hyunya riṅṅiṅṅaṅ ahala, daṇḍa ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana de saṅ prabhu, nəmaṅ suvarṇa daṇḍaanyaḍaṇḍanya, ma, su, 1, mā, 8, təkanya pirak, 9600, deniṅdoniṁ doṣa maṅkana, katambayaniṅna:tambayaniṁ doṣaniṅ maliṅ pavevehnya ṅaranika. dattasyaiṣoditā dharmyā yathāvad anapakriyā | ata ūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyāmi vetanasyānapakriyām || MDhŚ 8.213 nahanhan ta daṇḍanikaṅ vvaṅ viruddha pavevehnya, yogya deniṅ dumaṇḍaduməṇḍa ya, mamuktya pāpa ya, pinagəhakən saṅ paṇḍita vruh riṅ āgama. iti dattānapada:tanama:-data:nama-karmacarita.
Topic of Breach of Contract yo grāmadeśasaṁghānāṁ kr̥tvā satyena saṁvidam | visaṁvaden naro lobhāt taṁ rāṣṭrād vipravāsayet || MDhŚ 8.219 ikaṅ vvaṅ magavai samayasmaya: riṅ grāmagama:, riṅ deśa, riṅ saṅghasaṅgar, satyaasatya ya riṅ liṅnya, kunaṅ yan adva ya riṅ samayanya, makanimitta lobhanya, iṅgatakəna ya sakiṅ kahananya, maṅkana daṇḍanya de saṅ prabhu. nigr̥hya dāpayec cainaṁ samayavyabhicāriṇam | catuḥsuvarṇān ṣaṇniṣkāñ chatamānaṁ ca rājatam || MDhŚ 8.220 evaṁ daṇḍavidhiṁ kuryād dhārmikaḥ pr̥thivīpatiḥ | grāmajātisamūheṣu samayavyabhicāriṇām || MDhŚ 8.221 ikaṅIka adva riṅ samayasmaya, dadyaheridadyaherriṁ tuhunya, daṇḍan taḍaṇḍa: ya satus suvarṇasatusvarṇna:, ma, su, 1, 6400, daṇḍaniṅ mithyasamaya riṅ grāma, ma, su, 1, mā, 8, 9600, daṇḍaniṅcaṇḍaniṁ mithya riṁ deśa, ma, su, 1, māpa:, 4, 14600, daṇḍanikaṅ mithya riṅ saṅgha, ya ika sinaṅguh sipatniṅ nīrṇaniṇna: samaya, daṇḍa gati ikagatinika:. iti samvidvyatikramacarita.
Topic of Buying and Selling krītvā vikrīya vā kiṁ cid yasyehānuśayo bhavet | so ’ntar daśāhāt tad dravyaṁ dadyāc caivādadīta ca || MDhŚ 8.222 ikaṅ vvaṅ adval dravya, maməli kunaṅ, alarāmbəknya, alaraṅhalara paməlinya, amurah padvalanya, avicāraa kunaṅ, yan sapuluh vəṅi lavasanyalavasnya: vinəli, dinvalnya kunaṅ, valuyakəna ikaṅ pirak paməlisamli dravya, valuyakəna ikaṅvaluya:ka:ṁ dravya vinəlinya, ujarana aṅasih-asih, enaka kavuvusanyaEnakanya kavuvusanyaEnaka:vuvasanya, ikaṅ aməli dravya ulihanya piraknya, ikaṅ vinəlinya vehakəna iriya, paḍa dharmapaḍa:rmma ulah kālih yan maṅkana. pareṇa tu daśāhasya na dadyān nāpi dāpayet | ādadāno dadac caiva rājñā daṇḍyaḥ śatāni ṣaṭ || MDhŚ 8.223 kunaṅ yan livat sapuluh vəṅi, tan vehakəna ikaṅ dravya vinəlinya, mvaṅ piraknya tan valuyakəna, kədə̄kdəḥ pva ya malaku dva-dvalanya, mvaṅ valuyaniṅ piraknya, ika ta vvaṅ maṅkana, yogya daṇḍa de saṅ prabhu, ma, su, 1, mā, 4, təkanyatka:nyan pirak, kunaṅ yan kəbo, sapi, vəḍus, vinəlinya, katon pva doṣanya dedoṣanya de saṅ aməli, karva-təṅah lek lavasanyalavasnya, valuyakəna i saṅ matumbasanpanumbasan·, saṅ aməli valuyakəna piraknya, kunaṅ yan livat sakiṅ karvakaṁrva:--təṅah lek, yogya daṇḍan ikaṅ amaluyakəna, ma, su, 1, mā, 4, daṇḍanya.None of the witnesses has final punctuation after this sentence. aśvānāñ ca paśūnāñ ca tripakṣād arpaṇam bhavet | viparyaye tu daṇḍaḥ syāt manūṣyāṇān tu vatsarāt || OJ Aṣṭādaśavyavahāra REF Additional verse in Mandlik after DhŚ 8.223: paṇā dvādaśa dāpyaḥ syāt pratibodhe na ced bhavet | paśūnām apy anākhyāne tripadād arpaṇaṃ bhavet || . kunaṅ yan vvaṅvnaṁvaṁ vinəlinya, macañcala pva ya, satahunsthahun lavasanyalavasnya, valuyakəna ya, i saṅ matumbasanpanumbasan·, saṅ aməli valuyakəna piraknya, kunaṅ yan livat sakiṅ satahunstahun, daṇḍan ikaṅ amaluyakən de saṅ prabhu, kadi ṅūni. yas tu doṣavatīṁ kanyām anākhyāya prayacchati | tasya kuryān nr̥po daṇḍaṁ svayaṁ ṣaṇṇavatiṁ paṇān || MDhŚ 8.224 ikaṅ vvaṅ maveh alakya riṅ kanyā, tatan vinarahakən doṣanyadoṣa irikaṅ pavevehanyapavehanyapatevehanya, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, saṅ prabhu dumaṇḍa ya, ri saṅaṅ puluh nəm paṇa, mā, 4, ku, 3, 1900, təkanyan pirak. iti krayavikrayacarita.
Topic of Boundaries divā vaktavyatā pāle rātrau svāmini tadgr̥he | yogakṣeme ’nyathā cet tu pālo vaktavyatām iyāt || MDhŚ 8.230 ikaṅ maṅvan vuvusən pramādanya, yan iṅ rahina təkaniṅ halanikaṅ maṅvan, kunaṅ yan iṅ vəṅi kahilaṅan ya, iṅ umahnikaṅumahikaṅumaḥ hika:ṅ adravya ta ya, tan hana doṣanikaṅ aṅvanaṅona:ṅon yan maṅkana, kunaṅ yan ahala vaṅkəlaṅnikaṅ kaṇḍaṅ, tan pinagər kunaṅ, tan vinarahvineḥ ikaṅ madravya, hilaṅ tekaṅ kəbo riṅ vəṅi, ry umahnikaṅ madravya tuvi, ikaṅ maṅvan umaṅguhamaṅguḥmaṅguha pramādanya, maṅəlyanana ta ya irikaṅ hilaṅ. gopaḥ kṣīrabhr̥to yas tu sa duhyād daśato varām | gosvāmyanumate bhr̥tyaḥ sā syāt pāle ’bhr̥te bhr̥tiḥ || MDhŚ 8.231: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. naṣṭaṁ vinaṣṭaṁ kr̥mibhiḥ śvahataṁ viṣame mr̥tam | hīnaṁ puruṣakāreṇa pradadyāt pāla eva tu || MDhŚ 8.232 kunaṅ yan matikunaṁ yan mati ulərən, sinahut iṅ asu, kaləbū riṅ juraṅ, sumur kunaṅ, tan tinuluṅan deniṅ aṅvana:ṅaṅvan·, maṅəlyananamalyana:na juga ikaṅhi§ka:, maṅvan maṅkana. vighuṣya tu hr̥taṁ caurair na pālo dātum arhati | yadi deśe ca kāle ca svāminaḥ svasya śaṁsati || MDhŚ 8.233 ikaṅ vənaṅ-vənaṅ iṅalap riṅ maliṅ, maṅuhuh tikaṅ maṅvan, malakumlaku tuluṅ, ikaṅ vənaṅ-vənaṅ təhər hilaṅ, tan yogya ikaṅ maṅvan maṅəlyanana yan maṅkana, kunaṅ yan tan vruh riṅ deśa paṅvananapaṅaṅvanana, tan vruh riṅyogya kāla paṅvanana, hilaṅ ikaṅ iṅvanikaṅvan· denya, mon rahina, yogyāṅəlyanana ikaṅ maṅvan yan maṅkana. karṇau carma ca vālāṁś ca bastisnāyūni rocanām | paśuṣu svāmināṁ dadyān mr̥teṣv aṅkāṁś ca darśayet || MDhŚ 8.234. var. b: bastiṁ snāyuṁ ca, var. d: aṅkāni ikaṅ vənaṅ-kvənaṁ-vənaṅ yan mati, adoh ikaṅ madravyadr̥vya:, taliṅanya, kulitnya, buntutnya, *əyəh-əyəhanya, *vayaṅ-vayaṅanya, hampərunya, ika ta kabeh, mr̥tāṅga ṅaranya, vvatakəna ri saṅ madravya, cihnanya yan mati ika, saṅ madravya tan pamahidvaa yan maṅkana. ajāvike tu saṁruddhe vr̥kaiḥ pāle tv anāyati | yāṁ prasahya vr̥ko hanyāt pāle tat kilbiṣaṁ bhavet || MDhŚ 8.235 ikaṅ vəḍus, vivi, minda kunaṅ, sinahut iṅ asu, tatan tinuluṅan denikaṅ maṅvanmaṅon·, mati pvekaṅ vəḍus, tan tinuluṅan, samūlyanikaṅ mati, həlyananalyana:na denikaṅ maṅvan. tāsāṁ ced avaruddhānāṁ carantīnāṁ mitho vane | yām utplutya vr̥ko hanyān na pālas tatra kilbiṣī || MDhŚ 8.236 ikaṅ vənaṅ-vənaṅ apulaṅ alah mareṅ sukət, hana tatan sumiṅsal saviji, ya ta binuru sinahut deniṅ asu, ikaṅ arva-rvān tikaṅ asu, mati pva ya, tan ana doṣanikaṅdoṣanikaṁ maṅvan. dhanuḥśataṁ parīhāro grāmasya syāt samantataḥ | śamyāpātās trayo vāpi triguṇo nagarasya tu || MDhŚ 8.237: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. tatrāparivr̥taṁ dhānyaṁ vihiṁsyuḥ paśavo yadi | na tatra praṇayed daṇḍaṁ nr̥patiḥ paśurakṣiṇām || MDhŚ 8.238 ikaṅ sapi kəbo amaṅan paripariṁ, tan pinagər pva ya, asiṅ vənaṅ-vənaṅa yan maṅkana pva ya, tan daṇḍanənpaḍaṇḍanən ika de saṅ prabhu, ikaṅ maṅvan, ri səḍəṅikāṅvan-ṅvan°ṅonṅonan yāmaṅanyamaṅan paripariṁ tann pinagər. vr̥tiṁ tatra prakurvīta yām uṣṭro nāvalokayet | chidraṁ ca vārayet sarvaṁ śvasūkaramukhānugam || MDhŚ 8.239: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. pathi kṣetre parivr̥te grāmāntīye ’tha vā punaḥ | sapālaḥ śatadaṇḍārho vipālān vārayet paśūn || MDhŚ 8.240 ikaṅ vənaṅ-vənaṅ amaṅan paripariṁ huvus pinagər, ikaṅ maṅvan mulat ta ya, yogya daṇḍan ikaṅḍaṇḍa hikaṁ maṅvan, riṅ satus paṇa, mā, 5, 2000, tkanya. ikaṅ vənaṅ-vənaṅ maṅkana kramanya, yan tan hanamaṁkana: ikaṅ maṅvan lumihata, vrəgakəna ya denikaṅ masavah. kṣetreṣv anyeṣu tu paśuḥ sapādaṁ paṇam arhati | sarvatra tu śado deyaḥ kṣetrikasyeti dhāraṇā || MDhŚ 8.241 yapvan pamaṅan paripariṁ ikaṅ kəbo sapi, adoha sakeṅ avan, sakeṅ thānitani kunaṅ, ya ika kaliṅaniṅ ujar, anyeṣu, yogya daṇḍan ikaṅ maṅvan, ri satus lima likur paṇa, mā, 6, ku, 1, 2500. asiṅ pinaṅanyapinaṅanənya riṅ savah, satussavaḥ, han uvus pinagəran·, satus paṇa, daṇḍanya, vehakəna ri saṅ masavah, maṅkana pahiṅan bhaṭāra manu. anirdaśāhāṁ gāṁ sūtāṁ vr̥ṣān devapaśūṁs tathā | sapālān vā vipālān vā na daṇḍyān manur abravīt || MDhŚ 8.242 kunaṅ yan ləmbu mānak-anak, tapvan təka sapuluh rahina, *kaṇḍaṅanrahina:, ri kaṇḍaṅan·, ləmbu saṅ hyaṅ kunaṅ, amaṅanAmaṅana: pari riṅ savah, pinagər tan pinagər kunaṅ, tan ḍaṇḍan ikaṅ ləmbu maṅkana, liṅ bhaṭāra manu ṅūni. kṣetriyasyātyaye daṇḍo bhāgād daśaguṇo bhavet | tato ’rdhadaṇḍo bhr̥tyānām ajñānāt kṣetrikasya tu || MDhŚ 8.243 kunaṅ yan mati, tikəla ikaṅ ləmbu de saṅ masavah maṅdaṇḍa, galaknyamaṁḍaṇḍa galaknya hetu, daśaguṇakənanḍaṣaguṇna:kna samūlyanikaṅ ləmbu, həlyananyalyananya de saṅ masavah, kunaṅ yan kavula saṅ masavah, amatyani anikəli kunaṅ, pañcaguṇakəna-guṇa samūlyanikaṅsamulyananikaṁ ləmbu, həlyananyahalyananya, apan pakonpakvan saṅ tuhan ika. etad vidhānam ātiṣṭhed dhārmikaḥ pr̥thivīpatiḥ | svāmināṁ ca paśūnāṁ ca pālānāṁ ca vyatikrame || MDhŚ 8.244: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. sīmāṁ prati samutpanne vivāde grāmayor dvayoḥ | jyeṣṭhe māsi nayet sīmāṁ suprakāśeṣu setuṣu || MDhŚ 8.245 ikaṅ grāma rvaṅ siki, avicāra sīmāsimi, pagavayakəna sīmā vatəsvavəs·, tambak, ikaṅ hīṅan prakāśakəna ya de saṅ prabhu, atūta yukty ata ya, riṅ jyeṣṭhātah māsanya, ika ta kabeh gavayakəna ya i pahīṅananiṅ sīmā. upachannāni cānyāni sīmāliṅgāni kārayet | sīmājñāne nr̥ṇāṁ vīkṣya nityaṁ loke viparyayam || MDhŚ 8.249 aśmano ’sthīni govālāṁs tuṣān bhasma kapālikāḥ | karīṣam iṣṭakāṅgārāṁś charkarā vālukās tathā || MDhŚ 8.250 ikaṅ sīmā-liṅga tan katon, upacchannaUpacca:raṇaUpaccaraṇa: ṅaranya, konakəna gavayəngavaya de saṅ mavicāra sīmā kālih, ya ta paṅavruhanya hīṅaniṅ vatəsnya, an vulatihulattihulatthi kahilaṅanikaṅ cihna vr̥kṣa: vatu, tahulan, *bubatniṅ ləmbu, məraṅ, avu, kalapa, viṅka, karikil vatu, iṣṭaka, arəṅIR̥ṁ, paras, hənīhni tasik. ika ta kabeh, sīmā-upacchannaUpaca:ranna:Upaccara:§na-liṅga ṅaranya kabeh. yāni caivaṁprakārāṇi kālād bhūmir na bhakṣayet | tāni saṁdhiṣu sīmāyām aprakāśāni kārayet || MDhŚ 8.251: Our text does not seem to gives paraphrase for the last stanza grouped in this section. sīmāvr̥kṣāṁś tu kurvīta nyagrodhāśvatthakiṁśukān | śālmalīsālatālāṁś ca kṣīriṇaś caiva pādapān || MDhŚ 8.246 gulmān veṇūṁś ca vividhān śamīvallīsthalāni ca | śarān kubjakagulmāṁś ca tathā sīmā na naśyati || MDhŚ 8.247 kavruhana de saṅ prabhu hīṅan-hīṅaniṅhiṅaniṅaniṁhiṅaniṅani ləmahlvah-ikaṅ mavyavāhara, makanimitta cihnanya, tanəmana kayu ikaṅ vatəs, nyagrodhanyangrodḍa, variṅin, bodhi, ḍaḍap, śālmalī, lərək, sālaśalaśaL̥, raṇḍəraṇḍa, kṣīriṇakṣiriṇakṣiraṇa:, kayv akəmbaṅ avoh, vanaspati, kayv agətih, ya ta lvirnikaṅlvirikaṁlvirnika kayu tanəmən, riṅ pahīṅanan. śalmika, kasine, vehən makveha, raṇḍəraṇḍa: rambataniṅ udvad magəṅ, valya, valuh, kavitthakuvittaka:rttka:,vitta, jirətja§R̥th·, ika ta kabeh tanəməniṅ sīmā vatəs, tatan hilaṅaniṅ sīmāma vatəs yan maṅkana. taḍāgāny udapānāni vāpyaḥ prasravaṇāni ca | sīmāsaṁdhiṣu kāryāṇi devatāyatanāni ca || MDhŚ 8.248 etair liṅgair nayet sīmāṁ rājā vivadamānayoḥ | pūrvabhuktyā ca satatam udakasyāgamena ca || MDhŚ 8.252. The OJ paraphrase suggests that the author had before him a version reading kūpa instead of vāpi, with kūpa coming before udapāna. No such version of this stanza is known to us. taṭākatathakata:ntaka:, ḍavuhan, kūpa, sumur, udapānadupa:nadapana, talaga sinukan, prasravaṇa, vulakan, mvaṅ ikaṅ pamukty alavas, udakasya, hilīniṅ kali kunaṅ, nahan tanahana cihna paṅavruhanira. yadi saṁśaya eva syāl liṅgānām api darśane | sākṣipratyaya eva syāt sīmāvādavinirṇayaḥ || MDhŚ 8.253 yan saṅśaya saṅ prabhu ririṁ hananiṅ sīmāliṅga, pavarahniṅ sākṣi pituhunira, maṅkana deniṅ magəhakənamagəhnamagna sīmā səḍəṅ cinarita. grāmeyakakulānāṁ tu samakṣaṁ sīmni sākṣiṇaḥ | praṣṭavyāḥ sīmaliṅgāni tayoś caiva vivādinoḥ || MDhŚ 8.254 i papupulninikaṅ təpi siriṅnikaṅ mavyavahāra sīmā kālih, takvanana de saṅ prabhu, i səḍəṅ prasiddhaniṅ vatəsnikaṅvatəsikaṁ thānitani. te pr̥ṣṭās tu yathā brūyuḥ samastāḥ sīmni niścayam | nibadhnīyāt tathā sīmāṁ sarvāṁs tāṁś caiva nāmataḥ || MDhŚ 8.255 tinakvanan pva sākṣinyasakṣi kabeh, mavaraha ta ya irikaṅ prasiddha vatəs, ri huvusnyan pavarah, tulisakəna ta nāmanya, mvaṅ sapavarahnya irikaṅ vatəs.huvusnyan ... irikaṅ vatəs.huvusnyan pavaraḥ, tulisakna ta na:manya, mvaṁ sapavaraḥnya Irikaṁ vatəs· || tuvusnyan pavaraḥ, tulisakna ta namatyanya, mvaṁ sapavaraḥnya Irikaṁ vatəs· ||As a result of scribal confusion, this segment is also found after a locus of displacement in 23-08. śirobhis te gr̥hītvorvīṁ sragviṇo raktavāsasaḥ | sukr̥taiḥ śāpitāḥ svaiḥ svair nayeyus te samañjasam || MDhŚ 8.256 huvusnyan tinulisakən araniṅ sākṣinya kabeh,huvusnyan htinulisakən haraniṁ sa:kṣinya kabeḥ, mavaraha ta ya Irikāṁ prasidḍa: vatəs·, ri huvusnyan tinulisakən haraniṁ sa:kṣinya kabeḥAs a result of scribal confusion, this segment is repeated with dittographic insertion of an extraneous segment (cf. §230) right before a locus of displacement. konən ta ya sākṣinya sumuhuna ikaṅ ləmah sinəṅguhanyasinəṅgvanya vatəs, alapən sakala pagəṅnya, kambaṅana kambaṅ abaṅ, śapathanana ta ya de saṅdenira saṁ prabhu, liṅanira, tan təmva phalaniṅ gaventa hayu yan kita mithya, tuhu pva kitāvarahkitavruḥkittavruḥ, katəmu pva phalaniṅ gaventa hayu, liṅanira iriya. yathoktena nayantas te pūyante satyasākṣiṇaḥ | viparītaṁ nayantas tu dāpyāḥ syur dviśataṁ damam || MDhŚ 8.257 ikaṅ sākṣi kinənan śapatha, sapta divaśa hīṅanya, kadi pavarah ṅūni riṅriṁ ṅuni riṁ sākṣicarita, tan vikāra pva ya, pavitra ikaṅ satyasākṣi yan maṅkana, ikaṅ vatəs pavarahnya, pagəhakəna de saṅ prabhu, mithya pva sākṣinya, katəkan jāti-rogāgni-maraṇa, makāntaṅmaṅkana: taṁ sapta divasa, ika taṅ maṅkana, daṇḍan ta ya ikaṅ sākṣi, de saṅ prabhu, rvaṅ atus paṇa riṅ vvaṅ tuṅgalantuṅgal·, mā, 10, 4000, təkanya, ikaṅ avyavahāra mithya sākṣinya, sorakəna pakṣanya. sākṣyabhāve tu catvāro grāmāḥ sāmantavāsinaḥ | sīmāvinirṇayaṁ kuryuḥ prayatā rājasaṁnidhau || MDhŚ 8.258 yan tan hana sākṣya, takvananatanaknaThe form takvanana is frequently used elsewhere in the text, though also often affected by variance of manuscript testimony. Since the base taña is not used in our text, while no -akən form derived from takvan is attested elsewhere in the text and no such form would be contextually suitable, we decide against the emendations tañakəna and takvanakəna. taṅ caturgrāma, sakaparək deniṅ mavicāra, humatura riṅ saṅ prabhu, majara i tuhu sīmā vatəs vinicāra. sāmantānām abhāve tu maulānāṁ sīmasākṣiṇām | imān apy anuyuñjīta puruṣān vanagocarān || MDhŚ 8.259 vyādhāñ śākunikān gopān kaivartān mūlakhānakān | vyālagrāhān uñchavr̥ttīn anyāṁś ca vanagocarān || MDhŚ 8.260 te pr̥ṣṭās tu yathā brūyuḥ sīmāsaṁdhiṣu lakṣaṇam | tat tathā sthāpayed rājā dharmeṇa grāmayor dvayoḥ || MDhŚ 8.261 yanyen tan hana caturtanacatūr-grāma, vruh irikaṅ vatəs, tan hana ikaṅ maulāḥhanahana muvaḥhanahika: muvaḥEmended with reference to the Sanskrit original as well as the definition of maula in §66., matakvan saṅ prabhu ikaṅ asabhā-sukət, vyādhānvyaḍa:m·vya:dam·, tuha buru, śākunikānśakunikan·salakunika:n·, pakṣimatsyamr̥gān hanti-ma:tsya,mraga:ṅanti-matsya,mr̥ga:ṅanti, prapikat, prajariṅprasari manuk, maṅvan javi-javi, kaivartānkentartthan·kenkartan·, vvaṅ aparahu-parahu, vvaṅ manuhan suḍa uvi hilus, vyālagrāhān, vvaṅ amet ulā, uvaya, uñcha Uñja-vr̥ttīn, vvaṅ aṅasag-asag siṅgaṅ, vanagocarānvva:ṅanagocara, vvaṅ anulup lutuṅ, añjala ivak, ika ta kabeh, takvanana de saṅ prabhu, pajarakənaparajaknanapajaraknanaparajaṇa:, lakṣaṇa Alakṣaṇa:-nikaṅ vatəs, sapavarahnya pagəhakəna de saṅ prabhu, ikaṅ iṅ ləmah ikaṅ avicāra kālih, dharma sira yan maṅkana. Pāṇini, Aṣṭādhyāyī, 4.4.35 pakṣi-matsya-mr̥gān hanti. Examples of the grammatical derivation intended in this rule are given in Patañjali's Vyākaraṇamahābhāṣya (ed. Kielhorn-Abhyankar I,176.25-177.16) pakṣi-matsya-mr̥gān hanti: mātsyikaḥ. tadviśeṣāṇām: śāpharikaḥ, śākulikaḥ. And in the Kāśikāvr̥tti: pakṣi-matsya-mr̥gān hanti | tad ity eva | pakṣyādibhyo dvitīyā-samarthebhyo hanti ity etasminn arthe ṭhak-pratyayo bhavati | svarūpasya paryāyāṇāṁ tadviśeṣāṇāṁ ca grahaṇam iheṣyate | pakṣiṇo hanti pākṣikaḥ | śākunikaḥ | māyūrikaḥ | taittirikaḥ | matsya - mātsyikaḥ | mainikaḥ | śāpharikaḥ | śākulikaḥ | mr̥ga - mārgikaḥ | hāriṇikaḥ | saukarikaḥ | sāraṅgikaḥ ||. kṣetrakūpataḍāgānām ārāmasya gr̥hasya ca | sāmantapratyayo jñeyaḥ sīmāsetuvinirṇayaḥ || MDhŚ 8.262 ikaṅIka: savah, sumur, talaga, kubvan, pomahan, lakṣaṇanikaṅ sīmā vatəs, pavarahniṅ sāmantasapanta, yan tinakvanantinakvana: de saṅ prabhu, kapagəhakəna ya, prasiddhā yaprasiddhanyapr̥sidḍaya tuhu vatəshavas·. sāmantāś cen mr̥ṣā brūyu setau vivādatāṁ nr̥̄ṇām | sarve pr̥thak pr̥thag daṇḍyā rājñā madhyamasāhasam || MDhŚ 8.263 ikaṅIka: sāmanta təpi siriṅ kabeh adva ta denyāvarah, irikaṅ vatəs cinarita, paṅavruha yan adva kadi ṅūni konən aśapatha: ya, vikāra ta ya, yogya daṇḍan ikaṅ təpi siriṅ kabeh, de saṅ prabhu, madhyamasāhasa-saḍaśa daṇḍanya, mā, su, 1, mā, 9, 100001000, ri sāmanta-sāmanha-sāmanta. gr̥haṁ taḍāgam ārāmaṁ kṣetraṁ vā bhīṣayā haran | śatāni pañca daṇḍyaḥ syād ajñānād dviśato damaḥ || MDhŚ 8.264 ikaṅ vvaṅ amiḍikaviḍik· ləmah, pomahan, kubvan, savah, talaga sinukan,pomahan·, talaga, davuhan·, kubvan·, savaḥ, talaga siṅnukan,Note the redundancy in due to interference from §228. yogya daṇḍan ikaṅ amiḍik, de saṁ prabhu, limaṅ atus paṇa daṇḍanyapaṇa:hanya, mā, su, 1, mā, 9, 100001000, təkanya, kunaṅ yan tan vruh yan pamiḍik, rvaṅ atus paṇa daṇḍanya, mā, 10, təkanya. sīmāyām aviṣahyāyāṁ svayaṁ rājaiva dharmavit | pradiśed bhūmim eteṣām upakārād iti sthitiḥ || MDhŚ 8.265 səḍəṅnyan paḍa kdə̄-kdə̄a:dəkdək ikaṅ mavicāra kālih, athavā deniṅ aṅarthaaṅaṭa:, tan hana vənaṅ aṅisyani dravya-hajinya, pūrvasthiti kinavənaṅakən ya kunaṅ, alapən de saṅ prabhu ikaṅ sīmā, vruh riṅ dharma sira, yan maṅkana, vehakəna ya i mantrinira, paṅivvapaṅiva dharma hetunya, athavā deniṅ aṅarthaaṅa:rṭa:, vehakənanira ya rikaṅ deśākveh vvaṅnya, upakāra vənaṅ aṅisyani dravya haji, mvaṅ pūrvvasthitinya hetu, maṅkana liṅ saṅ hyaṅ haji, pilihana paḍa yukti ika. dhvajinī matsyanītaiva naidhānī bhayavarjitā | rājaśāsananītā ca sīmā pañcavidhā smr̥tā || Stanza interpolated after MDhŚ 8.265, ed. Mandlik & Dave: dhvajinī matsinī caiva, nidhānī ... dhvajinīvvājini, sīma kataṇḍān, matsyanītā, sīmāṅaturakən ivak, naidhānīneḍaninedanī, sīma kudur, bhayavarjitācayavarjjitasayavajivr̥, sīma svatantra, rājaśāsana, sīmasama lukayan, parujarparujaparaja haji kunaṅ, lima kvehiṅ sīma kavruhakəna. iti sīmācarita.
Topic of Verbal Assault eṣo ’khilenābhihito dharmaḥ sīmāvinirṇaye | ata ūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyāmi vākpāruṣyavinirṇayam || MDhŚ 8.266: Our text gives no paraphrase for this stanza, which marks the transition to a new topic in the Sanskrit text. We next expect MDhŚ 8.267 but we first get four stanzas not included in the critical edition, and only one of them recorded in its apparatus. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. halaniṅ śarīra, halaniṅ pajātyansajatyan·, halaniṅ pinaṅan, halaniṅ gavegavya:, halaniṅ kajanmankajanan·, halaniṅ kavitan, halaniṅ taliṅa, halaniṅ paṅrəṅə̄paṅr̥ṅa: kunaṅ, ika ta kabeh, inujarakəniṅhinujarakən riṁhinujara:kən· riṁ vvaṅ magalak, araniṅ ujar maṅkana, vākpāruṣya ṅaranya liṅ saṅliṅiṁ saṁ paṇḍita. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ujar hala ulihniṅ paṅrəṅə̄paṁṅr̥ṅa: pūrvaka, inujarakən denikaṅ aṅrəṅə̄ sahakrodhānya ta ya, tuhu ta ya, ndan magavay alarāmbək riṅ len, donya, inujarakən, ṅaraniṅ ujar maṅkana, vākpāruṣya ṅaranya liṅ saṅ paṇḍita.ujar hala ... liṅ saṅ paṇḍita No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vvaṅ manaṅguhpinaṅguḥ vuta, vuta kita liṅnya, ikaṅ sinaṅguh vuta tuhvatuha: ya vuta, ṅaraniṅ ujar maṅkana, vākparuṣya ṅaranya muvah liṅ saṅ paṇḍita. patitaṁ patitety uktvā cauraṁ caureti vā punaḥ | vacanāt tulyadoṣaḥ syān mithyā dvir doṣatāṁ vrajet || Stanza interpolated after 8.277. ikaṅ vvaṅ mojar iṅ ayan, ayan kita liṅnya, ndan ikaṅ ayan kr̥taprāyaścittakr̥tthaṁprayaścitta:, mojarma:jar iṅ maliṅ, maliṅ kita liṅnya, ndan ikaṅ maliṅ huvus dinaṇḍa, sabyayaniṅ aprāyaścittanikaṅ-beyaniṁṅ aprayaścitta, Ikaṅ-beyaniṁ prayaścitṭa:, Ika:ṁ ayan, sadaṇḍanikaṅ maliṅ ṅūni, ya kaliṅaniṅ tulyadoṣa, ya ta paṅdaṇḍa rikaṅpaḍaṇḍerika:ṁ manaṅguhmaṅguh ayan, mvaṅ ikaṅ manaṅguh maliṅ, ujarnya hetunyan dinaṇḍa, riṅri tan doṣanya, mithyā pva ya panaṅguhnya maliṅ, mvaṅ ayan, dviguṇakəna ikaṅ byayanyaya, mvaṅ daṇḍaniṅ-nikaṁ maliṅ ṅūni, maṅkana daṇḍanya yan mithyā. śataṁ brāhmaṇam ākruśya kṣatriyo daṇḍam arhati | vaiśyo ’dhyardhaśataṁ dve vā śūdras tu vadham arhati || MDhŚ 8.267 kunaṅ yan kṣatriya vākpāruṣya riṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa, yogya ḍaṇḍan iṅ satus paṇa, mā, 5, təkanya, vaiśya vākpāruṣya iri saṅ brāhmaṇa, rvaṅ atus limaṅ puluh paṇa, yogya ḍaṇḍan ya, mā, 121, 2, ku, 2, 5000, təkanya, rvaṅ atus paṇa kunaṅ, mā, 10, təkanya, kunaṅ yan śūdra vākpāruṣya iriṁ saṅ brāhmaṇa, yogya patyana ya. pañcāśad brāhmaṇo daṇḍyaḥ kṣatriyasyābhiśaṁsane | vaiśye syād ardhapañcāśac chūdre dvādaśako damaḥ || MDhŚ 8.268 kunaṅ yan saṅ brāhmaṇa vākpāruṣya riṅhiṁ kṣatriya, daṇḍanḍaṇḍa limaṅ puluh paṇa, mā, 2, ku, 2, təkanya. saṅ brāhmaṇa vākpāruṣya riṅhiṁ vaiśya, daṇḍan rvaṅ puluh limaṅ paṇa mā, 1, ku, 1, təkanya. saṅ brāhmaṇa vākpāruṣya riṅ śūdra, daṇḍa rva vlas paṇa, ku, 2, sa, 4, təkanya. viprakṣatriyavat kāryo daṇḍo rājanyavaiśyayoḥ | vaiśyakṣatriyayoḥ śūdre vipre yaḥ kṣatravaiśyayoḥ || First stanza interpolated after 8.268. saṅ kṣatriya, mvaṅ vaiśya silih vākpāruṣya, yogya daṇḍanḍaṇḍa kālih, yanya vaiśya vākpāruṣya riṅri saṅ kṣatriyasatriya, daṇḍan ya satus paṇa, mā, 5, təkanyama:, 5,, nyana tkanya. saṅ kṣatriya vākpāruṣya riṅ śūdra, sadaṇḍaniṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa vākpāruṣya riṅ śūdra, vaiśyasudr̥, ḍaṇḍanya, vesya vākpāruṣya riṅ śūdra, 440, daṇḍanya. yan śūdraṣatriya vākpāruṣya riṅ śūdrariṁ śudra:, riṁ satriyaThe segment riṁ satriya seems superfluous in , and yet we do not elsewhere find a statement on Śūdra assaulting Kṣatriya., kuśūsu, 2, pa, 2, daṇḍaa. śūdra vākpāruṣya riṅ vaiśya, mā, 5, daṇḍanyatka:nyatkanyaThe unanimous reading tkanya seems too problematic to be accepted. Instead of emending it to daṇḍanya, it might also be deemed a perseveration from mā, 5, təkanya just above and for that reason suppressed. Finally, we might as in §246 supply the paṇa equivalent to justify the presence of təkanya; in that case, the text would run śūdra vākpāruṣya riṅ vaiśya satus paṇa, mā, 5, təkanya., kagavayaniṅ daṇḍa riṅri rāja. samutkarṣāpakarṣābhyāṁ vipravad daṇḍakalpanā | rājanyavaiśyaśūdrāṇām r̥te vācyād iti sthitiḥ || Second stanza interpolated after 8.268. yanyen kṣatriya vaiśya śūdra kadi daṇḍaka:ṁ dinanḍa saṅ brāhmaṇa, tumūtana kasor kaləvihniṅ janma hetunika, tatan pamatyakəna* ya, maṅkana liṅ saṅ hyaṅ āgama. samavarṇe dvijātīnāṁ dvādaśaiva vyatikrame | vādeṣv avacanīyeṣu tad eva dviguṇaṁ bhavet || MDhŚ 8.269 ikaṅ pandaṇḍerikaṅ vvaṅ vākpāruṣya, kevala dvādaśa ya, paḍa vākpāruṣya riṅ sārah-arahnirariṁ sa:raharahirari sira:hika: sovaṅ-sovaṅ, hana pva vākpāruṣya irikaṅ tan hana doṣanya, kevalya dviguṇākəna ikaṅ-knanikaṁ dvādaśa paṇa, padlikurpatlikur paṇa təmahanya, mā, 1, pa, 4, daṇḍanikaṅ maṅkanaḍaṇḍa:nika:ṁ, maṅkana:kaṁ maṅkana. ekajātir dvijātīṁs tu vācā dāruṇayā kṣipan | jihvāyāḥ prāpnuyāc chedaṁ jaghanyaprabhavo hi saḥ || MDhŚ 8.270 kunaṅ deniṅdeniraṅ amatyani śūdra yan antyantahananta hala ujarnyahujanya riṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, tugəlana liḍahnya, maṅkana liṅ saṅ hyaṅ āgama, maṅkana daṇḍaanya, apan antyantahatyanta: sorniṅ janmanyajadmanya. nāmajātigrahaṁ tv eṣām abhidroheṇa kurvataḥ | nikheyo ’yomayaḥ śaṅkur jvalann āsye daśāṅgulaḥ || MDhŚ 8.271 ikaṅ ayomayaḥaśayaakasa śaṅkuḥgaṅśuḥ, limpuṅ vəsi, *tunvakənanudvaknanunvakna riṅ apuyapvay·, taṅan karva *təvəkakənatvə:kna riṅ tutukniṅri tutukni śūdra, yanhan aṅuman-uman ririṁ ṅaran saṅ brāhmaṇa, mvaṅ ṅaraniṅ tuha-tuhanira, makanimitta drohakanya ri sira. dharmopadeśaṁ darpeṇa viprāṇām asya kurvataḥ | taptam āsecayet tailaṁ vaktre śrotre ca pārthivaḥ || MDhŚ 8.272 ikaṅ śūdra, aṅuman-uman marah-marah saṅ brāhmaṇa, kədə̄ makanimitta bhaṅganyabhaganya, syukana ləṅa səḍaṅsḍəṅ apanasa:panəstapanas tutuknya, taliṅanyakaliṅanya, maṅkana daṇḍanya de saṅ prabhu.None of the manuscripts show final punctuation at the end of this section. śrutaṁ deśaṁ ca jātiṁ ca karma śarīram eva ca | vitathena bruvan darpād dāpyaḥ syād dviśataṁ damam || MDhŚ 8.273 ikaṅ śūdra, aṅucap ri halanyājinyahalanya rovaṅnya paḍa śūdra, kajanmanyakajadmanya, deśanya, gavenya, śarīranyaśararanya, ndatan tuhu sapaṅucapnya, makanimitta bhaṅganya, ika taIka: taṁIka:ṁ vvaṁ maṅkana, yogya daṇḍan rvaṅ atus paṇa, de saṅ prabhu, mā, 10,18,1 va təkanya. kāṇaṁ vāpy atha vā khañjam anyaṁ vāpi tathāvidham | tathyenāpi bruvan dāpyo daṇḍaṁ kārṣāpaṇāvaram || MDhŚ 8.274 ikaṅ vvaṅ manaṅguh putikənkutikən·, vuta, timpaṅ, salviraniṅsakalviranikaṁ vikāra, yadyapi tuhvatuha: sapanaṅguhspanaṅguḥ-nya, yogya daṇḍa de saṅ prabhu, tigaṅ kārṣāpaṇa, tigaṅ saga vəsi, 120,ba:ṅava təkanya. mātaraṁ pitaraṁ jāyāṁ bhrātaraṁ tanayaṁ gurum | ākṣārayañ chataṁ dāpyaḥ panthānaṁ cādadad guroḥ || MDhŚ 8.275 ikaṅ vvaṅ vākpāruṣya, *amlāmla *aṅiṅgatakənhamlamlahaṅiṅgutən·ha:mlamla:ṅiṅgutənhamlamlahaṅiṅgutakən· rībunyariṁbunira:, ri strīnya tan padoṣa, i vvaṅ sānaknya, ibunya, tan patūt i maryādaniṅva:ryyadaniṁ guru kunaṅ, ika tahita kabeh, yogya daṇḍan de saṅ prabhu, satus paṇa daṇḍanya, mā, 5, tkanya. brāhmaṇakṣatriyābhyāṁ tu daṇḍaḥ kāryo vijānatā | brāhmaṇe sāhasaḥ pūrvaḥ kṣatriye tv eva madhyamaḥ || MDhŚ 8.276 kunaṅ yan saṅ brāhmaṇajanmāṅiṅgatakən mātādinirabrahma:ṇadinirabrahma:ṇa:,dinirabrahma:ṇa:dinira, daṇḍan sira riṅ pūrvapūrvya:-sāhasa de saṅ prabhu, mā, 12, ku, 2,These indispensable abbreviations and values are supplied from the related context of §. təkanya. saṅ kṣatriyasatriya-janmāṅiṅgatakən-jadmaṅiṅgatakən-janma:ṅiṅiṅgatakən mātādinira, daṇḍan sira de saṅ prabhu, riṅ madhyamama:dhya-sāhasa, mā, su, 1, mā, 9ba:, ma:, y·, təkanya. viṭśūdrayor evam eva svajātiṁ prati tattvataḥThe paraphrase seems to imply the Javanese author had before him a text that read dharmataḥ. | chedavarjaṁ praṇayanaṁ daṇḍasyeti viniścayaḥ || MDhŚ 8.277 kunaṅ vaiśya, aṅiṅgatakən mātādinya, daṇḍan riṅ pūrvasāhasa de saṅ prabhu. śūdrāṅiṅgatakənśudra:ṅaṅśatatakən mātādinya, ya kaliṅaniṅ svajātimsya:jatim prati, antyādi deniṅ aṅarthaaha:rtha:, daṇḍan ya riṅ madhyamasāhasa, de saṅ prabhu, yukti ika denira, ya kaliṅaniṅ dharmataḥ. eṣa daṇḍavidhiḥ prokto vākpāruṣyasya tattvataḥ | ata ūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyāmi daṇḍapāruṣyanirṇayam || MDhŚ 8.278 ikaṅIka: daṇḍa vākpāruṣya, huvus inajarakənmami, mavaraha ta kamikapi daṇḍaniṅ daṇḍapāruṣyaḍaṇḍaniṁ paruṣya. iti vākpāruṣyacarita.
Topic of Physical Assault No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ aṅlarani vvaṅ, aṅrahi vvaṅ, anikəlana, anibākənahaniva:knaIn §, all mss. read the expected b instead of the v we find here., amatyananahamatyana kunaṅ, ṅaraniṅ ulah maṅkana, daṇḍapāruṣyaḍaṇḍareṣya ṅaranya, liṅ saṅ paṇḍita. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. However, there is a close Old Javanese parallel in KM 225: ḍəṇḍapāruṣya ucapən maṅke. riṅ voṅ amukul, anuduk iṅ kayu, aṅgitikiṅ vatu aṅlarani, aṅəmu gətih, atatuha kunəṅ, anugəlakən, anikəlakən baluṅ, makādi yen amatenana sarvasato, yen voṅ ādine, araniṅ ulah vivijinən, salah tuṅgala ikā ḍəṇḍapāruṣya arane, liṅ saṅ paṇḍita, maṅkana riṅ voṅ amraṅ iṅ sañjata, anuduk ādine, aṅgitik iṅ vatu, riṅ viṅkā, amukul iṅ kayu, riṅ baluṅ, anaṇḍat guluniṅ len iṅ tatali, aniləpakən iṅ bañu, anampel, amərəp, aṅgarut, anəpak, andədəl, aṅgoñoh (corr. aṅgocoh), aṅgapuk, anahuthamok, amlaciṅ, aṅidoni, aniratra ambal (corr. anirati umbəl) ilu, anampəki kəkəmahan, anampəki ririgən, aṅgutuk iṅ tai, aṅantepakən iṅ tai, anuṇḍuṅakən iṅ tai, riṅ patunan iṅ celeṅ, iku pratyekaniṅ ḍəṇḍapāruṣya. ikaṅ vvaṅ aməraṅ, aṅgutuk iṅ vatu, viṅka kunaṅ, amupuh iṅ kayu kunaṅ, iṅI tahulan, ahabət i hriAṅiñə:t i hrihabavirihatabə:t iṁ hri, mvaṅ tatali, aṅələmakən iṅ vvai, anampyal, andədəl, anahut, aṅgarut, anampək iṅi təḍa, nāhan pratyekaniṅ mulahakən daṇḍapāruṣya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ rva, sādhya, sādhana, sādhya ṅaranya, duḥkhādi, sādhana ṅaranya, śāstrādi, vəkasniṅ sādhanapada, vidyād garīyaḥvidya:ṅgariyaḥvidya:ttariṁyaḥ, kavruhana ləvih de saṅ paṇḍita, ikaṅ asādhanaIhasada:na śāstrādi ādinyaśa:stra:hadinya, nāhan śāstra kavruhakəna ləvih təmən ika, de saṅ paṇḍita. yena kena cid aṅgena hiṁsyāc cec chreṣṭham antyajaḥ | chettavyaṁ tad tad evāsya tan manor anuśāsanam || MDhŚ 8.279 ikaṅ śūdra, aṅlarani saṅ brāhmaṇa, makanimitta salviraniṅ śarīrāvayavanya, ika ta sādhananyapada:na:nya tugəlana ya de saṅ prabhu, maṅkana liṅ bhaṭāra manu. KM 226: riṅ bot dagaṅ aṅlarani riṅ brāhmaṇa, asādhana taṅan, suku, caṅkəm, śirah, ḍaḍa, gigir, bāhu, plat, silip (corr. silit) iku ta sādhanane pāruṣya riṅ samajanma ləvih kaṅ den-pāruṣyani, siṅ sādhanane aṇḍamalani, tu[ṅ]gelana de saṅ prabhu, maṅkana liṅ bha(ga)vā(n) manu riṅ śāsana. pāṇim udyamya daṇḍaṁ vā pāṇicchedanam arhati | pādena praharan kopāt pādacchedanam arhati || MDhŚ 8.280 ikaṅ śūdra yan paṅabət iṅ prəp, aṅayat riṅ palu-palu kunaṅ, i saṅ brāhmaṇa, yogya tugəlana taṅanya, de saṅ prabhu. andədəla ikaṅ śūdra i saṅ brāhmaṇa, makanimitta galaknya, yogya tugəlana sukunya, de saṅ prabhu. sahāsanam abhiprepsur utkr̥ṣṭasyāvakr̥ṣṭajaḥ | kaṭyāṁ kr̥tāṅko nirvāsyaḥ sphicaṁ vāsyāvakartayet || MDhŚ 8.281 ikaṅ śūdra yan aharəp aliṅgiha i paluṅguhanira saṅ brāhmaṇa, praṅən vaṅkiṅ-vaṅkiṅnya, ya cihnanya, mvaṅ *pva-pvalanya praṅən ya sasisih, dohakəna ya. avaniṣṭhīvato darpād dvāv oṣṭhau chedayen nr̥paḥ | avamūtrayato meḍhram avaśardhayato gudam || MDhŚ 8.282 ikaṅ śūdra aṅidoni riṅri saṅ brāhmaṇa, makanimitta galaknya, təvərən lambenya i sor i ruhursor§ luhur·, de saṅ prabhu. aṅəyəhi ikaṅ śūdra i saṅ brāhmaṇa, tugəlanatugla upasthanya. yen aṅəntuti saṅ brāhmaṇa, təvərana lətnya. keśeṣu gr̥hṇato hastau chedayed avicārayan | pādayor dāḍhikāyāṁ ca grīvāyāṁ vr̥ṣaṇeṣu ca || MDhŚ 8.283 ikaṅ śūdrārəṅgut hulu saṅ brāhmaṇa, amulirakən iruṅ, anəkəkAnkəl gulū, amijət *pəli, hayva ya iṅucap-ucap de saṅ prabhu, tugəlana ta hastanya kālih. tvagbhedakaḥ śataṁ daṇḍy lohitasya ca darśakaḥ | māṁsabhettā tu ṣaṇniṣkān pravāsyas tv asthibhedakaḥ || MDhŚ 8.284 salviranikaṅ daṇḍapāruṣya, ri savarṇanya, anecelakən* kulit, amətvakənhamtokənhamətokə: rah, satus paṇa yogya daṇḍa de saṅ prabhu, mā, 5. kunaṅ yan paṅanini dagiṅ, daṇḍa ya riṅ ṣaḍniṣka, mā, su, 1, mā, 8, 96009, Ebha, təkanya. kunaṅ yan panikəli, daṇḍan ya riṅ ṣaḍniṣka, iṅgatakəna ya. vanaspatīnāṁ sarveṣām upabhogo yathā yathā | tathā tathā damaḥ kāryo hiṁsāyām iti dhāraṇā || MDhŚ 8.285 kunaṅ ikaṅ vvaṅ aməraṅ kayu, salviraniṅsakalviraniṁ kayu, samūlyanikaṅsamunikaṁ kayu daṇḍanya, yan mati ikaṅma:tinikaṁ kayu denya, maṅkā həlyananyahəlyanananya, maṅkanamaṅka:nana liṅ bhaṭāra manu. manuṣyāṇāṁ paśūnāṁ ca duḥkhāya prahr̥te sati | yathā yathā mahad duḥkhaṁ daṇḍaṁ kuryāt tathā tathā || MDhŚ 8.286 ikaṅ aṅlarani vvaṅ, paśu kunaṅ, salaranikaṅ linaranya, pandaṇḍeriyapaṅdaṇḍeriya, ya tayeka: kaliṅaniṅna:liṅaniṁ yathā yathā. aṅgāvapīḍanāyāṁ ca prāṇavraṇaśoṇitayos tathā | samutthānavyayaṁ dāpyaḥ sarvadaṇḍam athāpi vā || MDhŚ 8.287. Our author seems to have read vraṇa-, a variant reading attested in numerous witnesses for the Sanskrit text. ikaṅ aṅlarani śarīra, aṅanini kunaṅ, aṅrahi, sabeyaniṅ anuluṅhanulu *patiba-jampyaa, daṇḍandaṇḍa ta ya riṅ prathamasāhasa, mā, 1213, ku, 2ṅa, təkanya. dravyāṇi hiṁsyād yo yasya jñānato ’jñānato ’pi vā | sa tasyotpādayet tuṣṭiṁ rājño dadyāc ca tatsamam || MDhŚ 8.288. A variant reading rājñā daṇḍyaś ca is recorded in Olivelle's apparatus. ikaṅ vvaṅ arəmpakhaṁR̥mpak· dravyaniṅ len, makanimitta vruh tan vruh kunaṅ, ikaṅIkaṁIn , three horizontal bars block out the line for about 9 akṣaras of width, without canceling any text previously written. maṅkana, aṅhəlyanana ta ya sapaṅanumānaniṅ dravya rinəmpaknya, kunaṅ yan tanta vruhThe sentence seems incomplete without a predicate here. Our cionjecture is merely diagonstic. Alternatives we have considered include hana, katon, kinavruh. *paṅanumāna, həlyanana samūlyanikaṅ dravya rinəmpaknya, daṇḍanḍaṇḍa riṅri pūrvasāhasapūr saha:sa.None of the witnesses has final punctuation at the end of this section. carmacārmikabhāṇḍeṣu kāṣṭhaloṣṭamayeṣu ca | mūlyāt pañcaguṇo daṇḍaḥ puṣpamūlaphaleṣu ca || MDhŚ 8.289 dval *viniṅkasviniṅkis·, aṅrəmək guci, aṅrəmək dyun, anugəl rəbahan, aṅalap kasumba, tuñjuṅ, vovohan, pañcaguṇakəna samūlyanikaṅ bhāṇḍa daṇḍaanyaya:ṇḍahanya. yānasya caiva yātuś ca yānasvāmina eva ca | daśātivartanāny āhuḥ śeṣe daṇḍo vidhīyate || MDhŚ 8.290 paṅlarani guluṅan, paṅlarani sārathi, paṅlarani ratha, sapuluh, liṅ saṅ paṇḍita, kunaṅ yan len sakeṅsakeṁ lyan sakeṁ sapuluh nimittanya paṅrəmpak bhāṇḍādi, vinarahakən daṇḍanyataṇḍanya:, ndya lvirnya sapuluh nihan. chinditāsyechinnanāsye bhagnayuge tiryakpratimukhāgate | akṣabhaṅge ca yānasya cakrabhaṅge tathaiva ca || chedane caiva yantrāṇāṁ yoktraraśmyos tathaiva ca | ākrande cāpy apehīti na daṇḍaṁ manur abravīt || MDhŚ 8.291-292. chinditāsye, pəgat kəluhanya, bhagnayuge, tikəl pasaṅanya, tiryak, kahiriṅ, pratimukhāgate, katuṅkəb, akṣabhaṅge, rəmpak cakranyaakranya, chatrabhaṅge, rəmpak ululnya, chedane caivacava yantrāṇām, pəgat *tali-rəṅganya, yoktraraśmyoḥragmyeḥragyeḥ, pəgat *savədnya, pəgat taliniṅjaliniṁ kudanya, ākrande, paṅuhuhniṅpaṅuhuḥnipaṅuvuḥniṁ manuṅgaṅ, sumiṅgahakən ta liṅnyatalinya, yan maṅkana lvirnya paṅrəmpakmaR̥mpak bhāṇḍa, tan daṇḍan ika liṅ bhaṭāra manu. yatrāpavartate yugyaṁ vaiguṇyāt prājakasya tu | tatra svāmī bhaved daṇḍyo hiṁsāyāṁ dviśataṁ damam || MDhŚ 8.293 yan paṅambah vənaṅ-vənaṅ siṅ lviranyalvirnya, ikaṅ maratha, makanimittamkadimita: tanSee §271 makanimitta vruh tan vruh kunaṅ. vruhnikaṅ amərəg, mati tikaṅhikaṁ kāmbah denya, yogya daṇḍan ikaṅ aguluṅanaguluṅin·, rvaṅ atus paṇa, daṇḍanya, mā, 10, təkanya, konən ta yāṅəlyananahaṅayyanana: samūlyanikaṅ pəjah. prājakaś ced bhaved āptaḥ prājako daṇḍam arhati | yugyasthāḥ prājake ’nāpte sarve daṇḍyāḥ śataṁ śatam || MDhŚ 8.294 ikaṅ sārathi, maṅakumalṅaku i hayvaniṅ ratha, vruh amuruga, hana pva vikāra denya, maṅkā pva yahayvaya, yogya daṇḍa satus paṇa, mā, 5, təkanya, tanyanya vruh pva ikaṅ amurug, mvaṅ tan paṅaku, hana pva vikāra denya, yugyasthāḥyogyastaḥ, sakvehnikaṅ manuṅgaṅ yogya daṇḍa ri satus paṇa sovaṅ-sovaṅ, mā, 5, təkanya. sa cet tu pathi saṁruddhaḥ paśubhir vā rathena vā | pramāpayet prāṇabhr̥tas tatra daṇḍo ’vicāritaḥ || MDhŚ 8.295 kunaṅ ikaṅ rathāṅalah, hana sattva kavədinya, liman, kuda ri harəpnya, matya ikaṅkaṁ vənaṅ-vənaṅ kāmbah denya, maṅkana pva ya, tan ucapən, tan daṇḍataṇḍa: ya, ikaṅ paśu mati tan əlyanana yaəlyanan·. manuṣyamāraṇe kṣipraṁ cauravat kilbiṣaṁ bhavet | prāṇabhr̥tsu mahatsv ardhaṁ gogajoṣṭrahayādiṣu || MDhŚ 8.296 yan vvaṅ mati kāmbah denya, sadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ daṇḍanikaṅ maratha, yan sattvasaṭa: prāṇi mati denya, mūlya ta ya, ləmbu, liman, kuda, sārdhamsadḍam·sadḍa:m·, satəṅahniṅ corah, daṇḍanikaṅ maratha, ma, su, 1, mā, 9, təkanya. kṣudrakāṇāṁ paśūnāṁ tu hiṁsāyāṁ dviśato damaḥ | pañcāśat tu bhaved daṇḍaḥ śubheṣu mr̥gapakṣiṣu || MDhŚ 8.297 hana ta paśu kāmbah denya, rvaṅ atus paṇa, daṇḍanikaṅ maratha, mā, 1018, təkanya, kunaṅ yan kidaṅ panuṇḍuṅ, manuk hayu, kāmbah denya, limaṅ puluh paṇa, daṇḍanikaṅ maratha, mā, 2, ku, 2, təkanya. gardabhājāvikānāṁ tu daṇḍaḥ syāt pañcamāṣikaḥ | māṣikas tu bhaved daṇḍaḥ śvasūkaranipātane || MDhŚ 8.298 kunaṅ yanyad gardabhagaḍarbbha:gaṇḍa:bbhagardḍarbbha:, vəḍus, vivi, minda, mati kāmbah denya, mā, 5, daṇḍaanya, asu, və̄k, mati kāmbah denya, mā, 1, daṇḍanikaṁ maratha. bhāryā putraś ca dāsaś ca preṣyo bhrātrā ca sodaraḥ | prāptāparādhās tāḍyāḥ syū rajjvā veṇudalena vā || MDhŚ 8.299 strī, anak, hulun, śiṣyagisya, sānak iṅ bapa, sānak iṅ babu, ika ta kabeh, sadoṣanya, palu-palu varahən ya, tali, vivilahvinilaḥ kunaṅ, pamalvana. pr̥ṣṭhatas tu śarīrasya nottamāṅge kathaṁ cana | ato ’nyathā tu praharan prāptaḥ syāc caurakilbiṣam || MDhŚ 8.300 valakaṅnya yan stryādisthyadistya:di, yan padoṣa, palvanən, hayva jugāmalvajuga:mamalva: hulu-hulu. eṣo ’khilenābhihito daṇḍapāruṣyanirṇayaḥ | stenasyātaḥ pravakṣyāmi vidhiṁ daṇḍavinirṇaye || MDhŚ 8.301 nahan daṇḍanikaṅ paruṣya, nirṇayanir§dḍa, huvus inajarakənmami-ma:ti, majara ta kami daṇḍaniṅ corah muvah.For the first time the conclusion of a topic is not marked with a colophon.
Topic of Punishment of Thieves paramaṁ yatnam ātiṣṭhet stenānāṁ nigrahe nr̥paḥ | stenānāṁ nigrahād asya yaśo rāṣṭraṁ ca vardhate || MDhŚ 8.302 saṅ prabhu yatnaa tayatna:ta tayatna:ta sira ri kadaṇḍaniṅka:ṇḍaniṁ maliṅ, phalanya, vr̥ddhi yaśanira, mvaṅ apagəh kaḍatvanira, makanimitta ri kadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ. abhayasya hi yo dātā sa pūjyaḥ satataṁ nr̥paḥ | sattraṁ hi vardhate tasya sadaivābhayadakṣiṇam || MDhŚ 8.303 kunaṅ saṅ prabhu yan maṅkana, aveh sira sukhaniṅsuka riṁ rāt, sira ta nityaśenastutiniṅ rāt, mataṅnyanmataṁnya maṅkana, apan paḍa kalavan mayajña sira, yan aṅgavaya karakṣaniṅ rāt, hana dānanira, pinakadānanira, pavehmaveḥ sukhaniṅ rāt. sarvato dharmaṣaḍbhāgo rājño bhavati rakṣataḥ | adharmād api ṣaḍbhāgo bhavaty asya hy arakṣataḥ || MDhŚ 8.304 sapanəmanirasapanəmva:niraṣapanaśvaranira: saṅ hyaṅ dharma sakeṅ sarvavarṇa, tinəmu saṅ prabhu, phalanira parakṣa .All of the manuscripts shows only a minor punctuation mark (as opposed to the usual section-ending mark) after phalanira parakṣa and there is no trace of transmission/paraphrase of the second half of the Sanskrit stanza. It appears that eye-skip led to loss of the corresponding segment of text at some stage of transmission. There is no way of knowing when this happened but it may have happened quite recently, hence we do not present this section merged with the next. yad adhīte yad yajateyad dadāti yad arcati | tasya ṣaḍbhāgabhāg rājāsamyag bhavati rakṣaṇāt || MDhŚ 8.305 saṅ maṅaji, saṅ mayajña, saṅ mapuṇya, saṅ matapa, sapanəmaniṅsapanəmvaniṅsapanənmaniṁsaṁ panəmaniṁ dharmanira sovaṅ-sovaṅ, tinəmunira de saṅ prabhutinmunira saṁ prabhu, apan hayuniṅ maṅrakṣamara:kṣa: saṅ prabhu, hetuniṅ siddha paṅajinira, siddha yajñanira, puṇyanira, tapanirapatapanira. rājā stenena gantavyomuktakeśena dhīmatā | ācakṣāṇena tat steyamevaṁ kartāsmievaṁkarmāsmi śādhi mām || MDhŚ 8.314 saṅ prabhu paranana de saṅ maliṅ, aṅuraihaṅure rambut mara riṅR̥ṅ harəpnira, avarah i kamaliṅanyahavaraḥ tika:hma:liṅanya, liṅnya, kartāsmikarttasman·ka:rtta:sman·ka:rttasman·, luməkas maliṅ kami, patyanante kamipatyanate ka:mipa:tyanante ta ka:mi, maṅkana liṅnya. skandhenādāya musalaṁlaguḍaṁ vāpi khādiram | śaktiṁ cobhayatas tīkṣṇāmāyasaṁ daṇḍam eva vā || MDhŚ 8.315 maṅalapapaṅala ta saṅ prabhu, halu, palu-palu pə̄ṅpa:, lipuṅ alaṇḍəp i sorsa:r i ruhur, gadā vəsi, paṅdaṇḍanira ry avakniṅ maliṅ. annāde bhrūṇahā mārṣṭi patyau bhāryāpacāriṇī | gurau śiṣyaś ca yājyaś ca steno rājani kilbiṣam || MDhŚ 8.317 ikaṅ strī aməḍəlhamḍəl·hamdəl· rarerareṁ jro vətəṅ, pāpanyapa:panyo pinerakənya ririṁ saṅ maveh səkul iriya, ikaṅ halvan yan mənəṅamənṅə jalunya, tan pamatyani ya, pinerakənya pāpanya riṅ jalunya, ikaṅ śiṣya, mvaṅ guru, tan pavarah riṅ daśaśīla, sapāpanya śiṣyasisiya, pinerakənya sapāpanya ri saṅsapa:pariṁ guru, saṅ prabhu yan tan paṅdaṇḍapaḍaṇḍapaṇa:ṇḍa: maliṅ, sapāpaniṅ maliṅ pinerakənyapinerakən ririṁ saṅ prabhu. śāsanād vā vimokṣād vā stenaḥ steyād vimucyate | aśāsitvā tu taṁ rājā stenasyāpnoti kilbiṣam || MDhŚ 8.316. If indeed this is the underlying Sanskrit stanza, then we must note that our text departs from the order of the Sanskrit text and represents this stanza's meaning very inadequately. saṅ prabhu yan paṅdaṇḍapaḍaṇḍa riṅ tann maliṅ, pinerakənya pāpaniṅ tan maliṅ ririṁ saṅ prabhu. rājabhir dhr̥tadaṇḍās tu kr̥tvā pāpāni mānavāḥ | nirmalāḥ svargam āyānti santaḥ sukr̥tino yathā || MDhŚ 8.318 ikaṅ maliṅ yan huvusya huvus·yan vushan uvus· dinaṇḍa de saṅ prabhu, ləpas pāpanya mulih mariṅriṁ svarga, kadi saṅ paṇḍita nirmalariṁ ḍa:rmma mantuk iṅriṁi svarga. yas tu rajjuṁ ghaṭaṁ kūpād dhared bhindyāc ca yaḥ prapām | sa daṇḍaṁ prāpnuyān māṣaṁ tac ca tasmin samāharet || MDhŚ 8.319 ikaṅ vvaṅ malapmaṅalap timbaniṅ sumur, talinya kunaṅ, vvaṅ arəmpak ulul iṅhulun riṁhulul i pasar kunaṅ, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, kālih yogya daṇḍa ya, mā 1, ku, 1, ikaṅ timba inalapnya, valuyakənanyava:luyakna ya, ikaṅ vavaruṅ rinusaknya, pahayunənyapahayunanya. dhānyaṁ daśabhyaḥ kumbhebhyo harato ’bhyadhikaṁ vadhaḥ | śeṣe ’py ekādaśaguṇaṁ dāpyas tasya ca tad dhanam || MDhŚ 8.320 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅalap parimaṅalapari riṅ pagaganpanaganpaṅgagan·, ləvih sakeṅ sapuluh saṅga, patyana ya, yan kuraṅ sakeṅsakiṁsakiṁsakiṁ sapuluh saṅga, ekādaśaguṇakənahana:daśaguṇakna ya riṅ sasaṅgasaṅga:, yanyen tan hana parinya, sapiraknikaṅpiraknika: inalapnya, ekādaśaguṇa, ya daṇḍanya, aṅalap iṅ rahina upādhinikaUpa:dinika:hupadinika:, kunaṅ yan vəṅiyanavṅi paṅalapnya, mon sañciṅ, sasaṅga, rvaṅ saṅga, inalapnyaIṅalapnya, patyana ya. tathā dharimameyānāṁ śatād abhyadhike vadhaḥ | suvarṇarajatādīnām uttamānāṁ ca vāsasām || MDhŚ 8.321 ikaṅ vvaṅ aṅalaphinalap· salviriṅ tinarajvan, mvaṅ tinakər, yan ləvih sakeṅ satus katitati, mvaṅ satus sukatsacatu sukat·satusukat·, patyana ya. ikaṅ aṅalap pirakIkaṅ aṅalapirak·, vastra uttama kunaṅ, patyana ya.ikaṅ aṅalap ... patyana yaThe whole second sentence is omitted in , clearly due to eye-skip, while omits the first three words of the second sentence, without it being evident how this would have come about. pañcāśatas tv abhyadhike hastacchedanam iṣyate | śeṣe ’py ekādaśaguṇaṁ mūlyād daṇḍaṁ prakalpayet || MDhŚ 8.322 kunaṅ yan ləvih sakeṅ limaṅ puluh sukatWe suspect that some words may have been lost here. The original text may have been something like sakeṅ limaṅ puluh kati mvaṅ limaṅ puluh sukat., ikaṅ tinarajvan tinakər inalapnya, tugəlana taṅanya, de saṅ prabhu, kunaṅ yan tan təka limaṅ puluh, ekādaśaguṇakəna ikaṅ inalapnyahiṅalapnya, ya daṇḍanya. puruṣāṇāṁ kulīnānāṁ nārīṇāṁ ca viśeṣataḥ | mukhyānāṁ caiva ratnānāṁ haraṇe vadham arhati || MDhŚ 8.323 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅalap vvaṅ ajanma, strī viśeṣavaseṣa: kunaṅ, mvaṅ maṇi mūlya, yogya patyana de saṅ prabhu. mahāpaśūnāṁ haraṇe śastrāṇām auṣadhasya ca | kālam āsādya kāryaṁ ca rājā daṇḍaṁ prakalpayet || MDhŚ 8.324 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅalap vənaṅ-vənaṅ akvehtakveḥ sañjatanya, tamba kunaṅ, kālanya, kāryanya, iṅət-iṅətənira, enak pvavvaṁ kavalik bəlahanya, tibākəna ikaṅ daṇḍa sayathāsambhavani-sambatani-sambhavaniṁ doṣanya. goṣu brāhmaṇasaṁsthāsu sthūrikāyāś ca bhedanamAll mss. of the Sanskrit text have bhedane, and this is what our author translates. | paśūnāṁ haraṇe caiva sadyaḥ kāryo ’rdhapādikaḥ || MDhŚ 8.325 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅalapmalap· ləmbu saṅ brāhmaṇa, aməraṅmamr̥hamra, anikəlana tahulaniṅtavulaniṁtahul·niṁ ləmbu kunaṅ, ika taṅ maṅkana, tugəlana sukunya sasisihsisiḥ, ya daṇḍanya de saṅ prabhu. sūtrakārpāsakiṇvānāṁ gomayasya guḍasya ca | dadhnaḥ kṣīrasya takrasya pānīyasya tr̥ṇasya ca || veṇuvaidalabhāṇḍānāṁ lavaṇānāṁ tathaiva ca | mr̥ṇmayānāṁ ca haraṇe mr̥do bhasmana eva ca || matsyānāṁ pakṣiṇāṁ caiva tailasya ca ghr̥tasya ca | māṁsasya madhunaś caiva yac cānyat paśusaṁbhavam || anyeṣāṁ caivamādīnāṁ adyānām odanasya ca | pakvānnānāṁ ca sarveṣāṁ tanmūlyād dviguṇo damaḥ || MDhŚ 8.326–329 ikaṅ vvaṅ aṅahal lavehaṅaṅahalavehaṅaha:lave, kapas, tahiniṅ ləmbu, gula, puhan vahu, puhan asəm, puhan putərsutər·, inum-inuman, dukut, raga, vakul, guci, uyah, dyunnyun·, tanah, bhasma, ivak, manuk, ləṅa vatuvahū, miñak, dagiṅ, madhu, bras, səkul, ikaṅ aṅahalhaṅaṅahal· maṅkana kabeh, samūlyanikaṅ pinetnya ləpihakənaL̥vihaknaL̥pikna ya daṇḍanya, de saṅ prabhu. puṣpeṣu harite dhānye gulmavallīnageṣu ca | alpeṣv aparipūteṣu daṇḍaḥ syāt pañcakr̥ṣṇalaḥ || MDhŚ 8.330 ikaṅ vvaṅ aṅalap kambaṅ, gaṅan, pari, odvadudva:n·Odvan·, kayu, ndatan pinagər ya, akəḍik tah ulihnya, ika taṅ maṅkana, daṇḍa ya riṅ limaṅ paṇa, ku, 1, 100100, 41, 100, 4, təkanya. paripūteṣu dhānyeṣu śākamūlaphaleṣu ca | niranvaye śataṁ daṇḍaḥ sānvaye ’rdhaśataṁ damaḥ || MDhŚ 8.331 ikaṅ aṅahalhaṅaṅahalaṅa:l pari, huvituvi, taləs, pinagəran tuvituviḥ, ndatan hanātuṅgv iriya, ika taṅIna taṁIka:ṁ ta maṅkana, yogya daṇḍa satus paṇa, mā, 5, 2000, təkanya, kunaṅ yan hanākəmit iriya, nəmaṅnma:ṁThe transmission is unanimous but we require limaṅ here. puluh paṇa daṇḍanya, mā, 2, ku, 2, 1000, təkanya. syāt sāhasaṁ tv anvayavat prasabhaṁ karma yat kr̥tam | niranvayaṁ bhavet steyaṁ kr̥tvāpavyayate ca yat || MDhŚ 8.332 ikaṅ vastu kinəmit, denikaṅ madravya, inalap pvaInalapva ya, ikaṅ haṅalap maṅkana, yeka valat ṅaranya, nāhan hetunyan dinaṇḍa limaṅ puluh paṇa, kunaṅ ikaṅ aṅalapṅalap· ri tan hanātuṅguana:huṅgu, aṅas prāyanikā, ika taṅ maṅkana, dadya ya səṅguhən maliṅ, nāhan hetunyan dinaṇḍa satus paṇa. yas tv etāny upakl̥ptāni dravyāṇi stenayen naraḥ | taṁ śataṁ daṇḍayed rājā yaś cāgniṁ corayed gr̥hāt || MDhŚ 8.333 ikaṅ vvaṅ aṅalap dravya pinahayu,vvaṁ ha§ṅalap· dr̥vya: pinaha:yu, vvaṁ ha:ṅalap· dr̥vya: pinahayu vvaṅhikaṁ aṅalap sādhananiṅ ahomahavomma:, ikaṅ hanery umah, ika taṅ maṅkanaIka: taṁ maṅka:kaṁ maṅkana: kālih, daṇḍanḍaṇḍa ya riṅ prathamasāhasa, mā, 1213, 48004000, təkanya. yena yena yathāṅgena steno nr̥ṣu viceṣṭate | tat tad eva haret tasyaThe paraphrase suggests that our author had before him a variant reading with a causative verb form, like tat tad prahārayet tasya. pratyādeśāya pārthivaḥ || MDhŚ 8.334 ikaṅ maliṅ luməkas maṅalaphaṅalap· dravyaniṅ vvaṅ, makasādhanamaka:sḍana: avaknyatava:knya:, konakənakvanakna ya praṅən avaknya de saṅ prabhu, ndatan matya ya, cihnanyancihnanya kavruhan yan maliṅ deniṅ vvaṅ riṅ dlāhan. pitācāryaḥ suhr̥n mātā bhāryā putraḥ purohitaḥ | nādaṇḍyo nāma rājño ’sti yaḥ svadharme na tiṣṭhati || kārṣāpaṇaṁ bhaved daṇḍyo yatrānyaḥ prākr̥to janaḥ | tatra rājā bhaved daṇḍyaḥ sahasram iti dhāraṇā || MDhŚ 8.335–336: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first two stanzas grouped in this section. aṣṭāpādyaṁ tu śūdrasya steye bhavati kilbiṣam | ṣoḍaśaiva tu vaiśyasya dvātriṁśat kṣatriyasya tu || MDhŚ 8.337 ikaṅ śūdra yan maliṅ, daṇḍa ya, mā, su, 2, təkanya. kunaṅ ikaṅ veśya yanyan veṣya maliṅ, daṇḍa ya, mā, su, 4, təkanya. kunaṅ yan kṣatriya maliṅyan· kṣatriya yan iṁ maliṁ, daṇḍaniraḍaṇḍanya, mā, su, 8, təkanya. brāhmaṇasya catuḥṣaṣṭiḥ pūrṇaṁpūrvaṁOlivelle's ms. NKT4 has the same reading. vāpi śataṁ bhavet | dviguṇā vā catuḥṣaṣṭis taddoṣaguṇavid dhi saḥ || MDhŚ 8.338 kunaṅ saṅkunaṁ yan· saṁ brāhmaṇa yan maliṅ, daṇḍanira mā, sū, 16, təkanya. dadi pūrva satus paṇa ṅaraniṅ daṇḍanira, apanAn sira vruh riṅ doṣaguṇa, umambah paṅavruhira yan maṅkana. A very close parallel is found in Leiden Or 9376 (Sārasamuccaya): ika vvaṅ śūdra yaṅ maliṅ, daṇḍa su 2. kunaṅ ikaṅ vvaṅ vaiśya yan maliṅ, daṇḍa su4. kunaṅ yan vvaṅ kṣatriya yan maliṅ, daṇḍanira supra (8?). kunaṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa yan maliṅ, daṇḍanira su 16, dadi pūrva satus paṅarani daṇḍanira. pan sira vruh riṅ doṣaguna, umambah paṅvruhnira, yan maṅkana. eteṣāṁ śanakair muṣṭir gr̥hītavyā maryādinā | śākaṁ śākapramāṇena gr̥hyamāṇaṁ na duṣyati || Our tentative reconstruction of a variant version of a stanza interpolated in some MDhŚ manuscripts after 8.341. Olivelle found it in his mss. BCa OOr with the wording eteṣāṁ śanakair muṣṭir gr̥hitavyā padhacchitaiḥ [?] | śākaṁ śānapramāṇena gr̥hyamāṇaṁ na duṣyati ||. More coherent readings of the stanza are quoted in various dharmanibandha texts, with attribution to Nārada. Devaṇṇabhaṭṭa's Smr̥ticandrikā, Āhnikakāṇḍa: nārado 'pi | śālivrīhitilānāṃ tu muṣṭir grāhyā vidhīyate | yavagodhūmayor vāpi yadi vā mudgamāṣayoḥ || eteṣāṃ mānavair muṣṭir grahītavyāpadi sthitaiḥ | śākaṃ śākapramāṇena gṛhyamāṇaṃ na duṣyati || grahītavyāni puṣpāṇi devatārcanakāraṇāt | adattadāyinaṃ vidyād yady abhyadhikam icchati || āpadi sthitair adhikam ity arthaḥ, "tilamudgamāṣayavagodhūmādīnāṃ sasyamuṣṭigrahaṇeṣu na doṣaḥ pathikānām" iti smaraṇāt | Lakṣmīdhara's Kr̥tyakalpataru, Gr̥hasthakāṇḍa: nāradaḥ | śālivrīhiprasūtānāṃ muṣṭir grāhyo vidhīyate | [324] yavagodhūmayor vāpi yadi vā mudgamāṣayoḥ || aniṣiddhair (?) gṛhītavyo muṣṭir ekaḥ pathi sthitaiḥ | śākaṃ śākapramāṇena gṛhyamāṇaṃ na duṣyati || grahītavyāni puṣpāṇi devatārcanakāraṇāt | adattādāyinaṃ vidyād yadi tv adhikam icchati || “śākapramāṇam” hārītoktaṃ muṣṭidvayam | vṛddhamanuḥ | caṇakavrīhigodhūmayavānāṃ mudgamāṣayoḥ | anirbaddhair gṛhītavyo muṣṭir ekaḥ pathi sthitaiḥ || “anirbaddhaiḥ” asaṃbaddhaiḥ asvāmibhir iti | ikaṅ kayu alapənya, maryādīma:ryyadimaryyadi, saṅkesa⌈ṅkeṁ galəṅgaL̥ saṅkanya, sāgəman ta hiṅananya, makahiṅana kukunya, kunaṅ yan gaṅan, sayogya gaṅana hiṅananyagaṅanandaṅananyagaṅan·nanda:ṅananya, tan doṣanadoṣananya ika. asaṁditānāṁ saṁdātā saṁditānāṁ ca mokṣakaḥ | dāsāśvarathahartā ca prāptaḥ syāc caurakilbiṣam || MDhŚ 8.342 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅapusi tan yogyāpusanayogya:pusa:n·, aṅuvakən ri yogyāpusanayogya:pusa kunaṅ, aṅalap hulun-hulun, kuda, ratha, ika ta kabeh, sadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ daṇḍanya, mā, su, 3, mā, 2 anena vidhinā rājā kurvāṇaḥ stenanigraham | yaśo ’smin prāpnuyāl loke pretya cānuttamaṁOut author seems to have had before him a variant reading without an-, e.g., cāpy uttamaṁ. sukham || MDhŚ 8.343 kadaṇḍaniṅ maliṅ gavayakəna saṅgavaya:kna de saṁ prabhu, makasādhanamaka:sḍana: varah-varah saṅ hyaṅ āgama, maṅkana pva sira, amaṅguh sira yaśahyaśa: riṅ loka, mvaṅ uttamaa sukhanira riṅ dəlahan. iti coradaṇḍacarita.
Topic of Violence No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ doṣa sāhasa, salviranyasalvirnya, varahakənaṅkvavarahaknaṅku, maṅkana pva ya, śr̥ṇu, maṅrəṅvamaṁR̥bva: ta kita, ndya ya, govadhaḥgobadḍyaḥgoba:dḍya:, naravadhaḥnarabadḍyaḥnarabaḍya. vānaspatyaṁ mūlaphalaṁ dārv agnyarthaṁ tathaiva ca | tr̥ṇaṁ ca gobhyo grāsārtham asteyaṁ manur abravīt || MDhŚ 8.339 aṅalapa kayu makambaṅ avoh, ikaṅ mūlaphala,mula ta phala:,mūlaphala, la, kayu tunu, pūjākəna i yajña donanya, aṅalapa dukut pakananiṅ ləmbu donanya, ikaṅ maṅalap maṅkana, tan maliṅ ika liṅ bhaṭāra manu. yo ’dattādāyino hastāl lipseta brāhmaṇo dhanam | yājanādhyāpanenāpi yathā stenas tathaiva saḥ || MDhŚ 8.340 kunaṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa anaṅgapi mas sakiṅsakeṁ taṅaniṅ maliṅ, pavehniṅpavehiṁpaveḥhiṁ maliṅ iṅ sira, səḍaṅnirasḍaṅirasḍaṁṅira pinakaviku, pinakapaṅajyan, saṅ brāhmaṇabraha:ṇa maṅkana, paḍa lavan maliṅ sira yan maṅkana. dvijo ’dhvagaḥ kṣīṇavr̥ttir dvāv ikṣū dve ca mūlake | ādadānaḥ parakṣetrān na daṇḍaṁ dātum arhati || MDhŚ 8.341 nahannihan saṅ brāhmaṇa yan palaku-lakuplaku-laku tan hana pinaṅanirapinaṅanasira:, aṅalapa ta sira təbu rvaṅ utəruhə§r, əmpuniṅ taləs oliha rvaṅ viji, riṅ kubvanThe transmitted reading does not yield a plausible sense. We suspect that the intended text was sometjhing like taləs rvaṅ viji riṅ əmpuniṅ kubvan: the word əmpuniṅ seems displaced and the word oliha altogether superfluous. pinakādi jroniṅ pagər, tan daṇḍa sira liṅ bhaṭāra manu. caṇakavrīhigodhūmayavānāṃ mudgamāṣayoḥ | aniṣiddhair gṛhītavyo muṣṭir ekaḥ pathi sthitaiḥ || The paraphrase seems to correspond well enough to this stanza which, though absent from Olivelle's edition, is attributed to Manu by some medieval authorities on dharmaśāstra and cited by them immediately after (or close to) MDhŚ 8.341. See, e.g., Lakṣmīdhara (KKT ...), Vijñāneśvara (Mitākṣarā ...). A similar stanza is interpolated here in some mss. collated by Olivelle (mss. BCa OOr La1): śālivrīhimasūrāṇāṁ muṣṭigrāhe vidhīyate | yavagodhūmayor vāpi tathā ca mudgamāṣayoḥ || (read: -grāhyaṁ?). kunaṅ yan pari, kətan, java, atak baṅ, putih, sāgəman ta olihanirāṅalapa, tan sikaranən ta sira yan maṅkana. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ulahaniṅ atavan-tavanahavan-avan·haṅavan-avan·avan-avan·, amatisahatiAll mss. read sahati, but amati is expected before ləmbu so if sahati is not the result of anticipation of sāhasa, it may be the vestige of lost intervening text, perhaps quoting Sanskrit. ləmbu, amati vvaṅ hamərəp strī laraṅan, ika ta kabeh sāhasa ṅaranikaṅaranira. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. LIST SEMI-PARALLELS HERE? vvaṅ amahala kanyā, aṅlarani vvaṅ alaku-laku, amahalahamala thāni, aṅrəmpakhaR̥mpa§k umahniṅ vaneh, ika ta kabeh, sāhasa ṅaranika. na mitrakāraṇād rājā vipulād vā dhanāgamāt | samutsr̥jet sāhasikān sarvabhūtabhayāvahān || MDhŚ 8.347 hayva mənəṅ saṅ prabhu, yan ikaṅ vvaṅ sāhasika, yadyapin mitraamatraha:, mon vənaṅ anahurākveh, apan karəsniṅtaR̥sniṁ vvaṅ akveh inulahakəniraInulatakənirahinulatakənira, patyananira ta pva ya. śastraṁ dvijātibhir grāhyaṁ dharmo yatroparudhyate | dvijātīnāṁ ca varṇānāṁ viplave kālakārite || MDhŚ 8.348. Olivelle reports a variant read jātīnāṁ ca savarṇānāṁ from his witness MTr6. dharma saṅ brāhmaṇa, tan yogya ri sañjata, yadyapiyadyapin maṅkana, səḍəṅiṅsḍaṁṅiṁ savarṇavarṇna, tuluṅənThe word tuluṅən seems intrusive here, so we suppress it. katəkan duhkha sināhasan, tan savarṇaa kunaṅ, tuluṅən katəkan duhkha sināhasankatkan ḍuḥka: kaṁ sinahasan·tka:n duḥka sihinaha:san·, apan phalanyanpalanya gəgə̄n. ātmanaś ca paritrāṇe dakṣiṇānāṁ ca saṁgare | strīviprābhyupapattau ca ghnan dharmeṇa na duṣyati || MDhŚ 8.349 saṅ prabhu tan pāpa sira, matyanipama:tyani sāhasika, rumakṣāvaknirarumakṣavakira, rumakṣa dakṣiṇā, tan kālapa deniṅ maliṅ, katuluṅananiṅkatuluṅaniṁ strī mvaṅ saṅ brāhmaṇa, ika ta kabeh, dharma ika ulahnira, mataṅnyan tan hana pāpalara siran pamatyanipatyani sāhasika. guruṁ vā bālavr̥ddhau vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā bahuśrutam | ātatāyinam āyāntaṁ hanyād evāvicārayan || MDhŚ 8.350 guruṁ vāguruha:, mon rare, mon atuha, mon brāhmaṇa, mon vruh maṅaji, yan umulahakən ātatāyia:tata:, luməkas pva ya, ika ta kabeh, hanyātAnyat·hanyat· tumuluytumuluy·, patyanana de saṅ prabhu, hayva inucap-Ayvenucap-ucap juga ya. agnido viṣadaś caiva śastrakaras tv atharvaṇaḥ | rājapiśuno dārātikramaḥ ṣaḍ ātatāyinaḥ || Reconstructed from the lemmata in the paraphrase. A close parallel is found in Ślokāntara 32: agnido viṣadātharvau śastraghno dārātikramaḥ | piśunas tatra tad rājñi ṣaḍ ete hy ātatāyinaḥ ||. Olivelle's edition of MDhŚ records an similar verse as interpolated in some witness after 8.351: agnido garadaś caiva śastrapāṇir dhanāpahaḥ | kṣetradāraharaś caiva ṣaḍ ete ātatāyinaḥ ||. The same verse is also transmitted as VDhS 3.16. kunaṅ ṣaḍ ātatāyi ṅaranyaṅa, agnidaḥ, anunvani, viṣadaḥ, aṅracun, śastrakaraḥAstrajatakaraḥśa:strajatakaraḥThe string jata seems intrusive., aṅamuk, atharvaṇaḥ, anəluhArttavaneḥ, AnluḥAr§tavanehanluḥ, rājapiśunaḥra:japisuna:ra:japisuna, amitukarakən saṅ prabhu, dārātikramaḥḍa:ratikramaḍa:ratikrama:,, aṅalvani, amuṅpaṅ kunaṅ, nəm kvehnya, ātatāyi ṅaranya, tan hana pāpaniṅ amatyani ātatāyi, maṅkana pagəhniṅ pavarah saṅ hyaṅ dharma. nātatāyivadhe doṣo hantur bhavati kaś cana | prakāśaṁ vāprakāśaṁ vā manyus tanmanyum r̥cchati || MDhŚ 8.351: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first stanza grouped in this section. paradārābhimarśeṣu pravr̥ttān nr̥̄n mahīpatiḥ | udvejanakarair daṇḍaiś cihnayitvā pravāsayet || MDhŚ 8.352 ikaṅ vvaṅ aməkul strī laraṅan, cihnana ya de saṅ prabhu, salvirniṅ daṇḍa kelik-elik daṇḍaanya, pravāsayetpravarayet·Cf. (§108)., dohakəna ya. tatsamuttho hi lokasya jāyate varṇasaṁkaraḥ | yena mūlaharo ’dharmaḥ sarvanāśāya kalpate || parasya patnyā puruṣaḥ saṁbhāṣāṁ yojayan rahaḥ | pūrvam ākṣārito doṣaiḥ prāpnuyāt pūrvasāhasam || yas tv anākṣāritaḥ pūrvam abhibhāṣate kāraṇāt | na doṣaṁ prāpnuyāt kiṁ cin na hi tasya vyatikramaḥ || MDhŚ 8.353–355: Our text gives no paraphrase for the first three stanzas grouped in this section. parastriyaṁ yo ’bhivadet tīrthe ’raṇye vane ’pi vā | nadīnāṁ vāpi saṁbhede sa saṁgrahaṇam āpnuyāt || MDhŚ 8.356 ikaṅ vvaṅ aṅucap-ucap lavan strīniṅhistriniṁ len, inuhutan ya riṅ deśanya, daṇḍan ya riṅ pūrvasāhasa, mā, 12, ku, 2ṅa, təkanya. upakārakriyā keliḥ sparśo bhūṣaṇavāsasām | sahakhaṭvāsanaṁ caiva sarvaṁ saṁgrahaṇaṁ smr̥tam || MDhŚ 8.357: the paraphrase seems to imply a variant reading tat strīsaṅgrahaṇaṁ instead of sarvaṁ saṁgrahaṇaṁ. hana strī aveh riṅ vvaṅ lanaṅ, asivo-sivoharsavo-sivo lavan lanaṅ, kaṅgoniṅ bhūṣaṇanyabhuṣaṇa, mvaṅ dodotnya deniṅ lanaṅ, pasaṇḍiṅnya luṅguh mvaṅ lanaṅ, ika taṅ ulah maṅkana, strīsaṅgrahaṇa ṅaranika. striyaṁ spr̥śed adeśe yaḥ spr̥ṣṭo vā marṣayet tayā | parasparasyānumate sarvaṁ saṁgrahaṇaṁ smr̥tam || MDhŚ 8.358 ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅgaməl strī riṅ śūnya, ginaməl deniṅ strī kunaṅ, umənəṅ ta ya, səḍəṅnyan *inanumananiinumaṇaniṁ rovaṅnya, ikaṅ vvaṅ lanaṅ maṅkanamaṅka ulahnya, strīsaṅgrahaṇa ṅaranya. abrāhmaṇaḥ saṁgrahaṇe prāṇāntaṁ daṇḍam arhati | caturṇām api varṇānāṁ dārā rakṣyatamāḥ sadā || MDhŚ 8.359 kunaṅ yan tan brāhmaṇa gumavayakən strīsaṅgrahaṇa, atyantaAntyanta ta ya yogya patyana, kunaṅ yan tan atyantaantyanha doṣanya, daṇḍan, mā, su, 3, mā, 2, 200002, 200020000, daṇḍanya de saṅ prabhu, paramārthaniṅrama:rtha:niṁ caturjanma, rakṣa təmən juga ya. bhikṣukā bandinaś caiva dīkṣitāḥ kāravas tathā | saṁbhāṣanaṁ saha strībhiḥ kuryur aprativāritāḥ || MDhŚ 8.360 saṅ bhikṣuka, vetālika, saṅ dīkṣita, uṇḍahagiUṇḍagiSpelling normalized after the instance in §69., ika ta kabeh, tan uhutana, dadyauhutana tadadya paṅucap-ucapapaṅucap-ucapanhaṅucapucapa: lavan strīniṅ len.The syntax of the second half of the paragraph is difficult with transmitted paṅucap-ucapa. One conceivable emendation is dadyan paṅucap-ucapa,with denasalized equivalent of maṅucap-ucapa, but we rather assume that the n in is the result of reinterpretation at the end of a long textual omission. Although the manuscripts again read paṅucap- for expected maṅucap- in §330, we emend there too, arguing that several forms denasalized after yan in the context influenced the transmission of forms where denasalization should not occur. na saṁbhāṣāṁ saha strībhiḥ pratiṣiddhaḥ samācaret | niṣiddho bhāṣamāṇas tu suvarṇaṁ daṇḍam arhati || naiṣa cāraṇadāreṣu vidhir nātmopajīviṣu | sajjayanti hi te nārīr nigūḍhāś cārayanti ca || kiṁ cid eva tu dāpyaḥ syāt saṁbhāṣāṁ tābhir ācaran | praiṣyāsu caikabhaktāsu rahaḥ pravrajitāsu ca || MDhŚ 8.361–363 kunaṅ yan paṅucapa mvaṅ strīniṅstri hulun-hulun, strīniṅ menmen, tan aranana strīsaṅgrahaṇastrisaṅgraha:, apan kasəgəhakənaṅ donikankasəgəhaknandonika:nkasəgə:haknakenda:nikan mara, hayva tan asənətan yan paṅucap-ucap. kunaṅ yan iṅ śūnya, maṅucap-paṅucap-ucapa kalavan strīniṅ cāraṇa, menmen, strī vruh kinonkon, strīniṅ vvaṅ bhakti, kili-kilikali-kali kunaṅ, yogya daṇḍan kadikādya ṅūni, sasuvarṇa, mā, 4, təkanya. yo ’kāmāṁ dūṣayet kanyāṁ sa sadyo vadham arhati | sakāmāṁ dūṣayaṁs tulyo na vadhaṁ prāpnuyān naraḥ || MDhŚ 8.364 ikaṅ vvaṅ sāhasāmuṅpaṅ kanyā, ika taṅ maṅkana, yogya patyana usən ya depatyanya Usən· ya depatyanya, Usən ḍepa:tya:nya Usə:n· ya de saṅ prabhu, kunaṅ yan mahyun ikaṅ kanyā, mvaṅ paḍa kavvaṅanya, tan patyanana ikaṅ maṅkana. kanyāṁ bhajantīm utkr̥ṣṭaṁ na kiṁ cid api dāpayet | jaghanyaṁ sevamānāṁ tu saṁyatāṁ vāsayed gr̥he || MDhŚ 8.365 ikaṅ vərəh-vərəhvəR̥-vəR̥ḥ, sujanmasujadma, anavanakənhanava:nhakənhanvakən kanyā sor janmanyaśujadmanya, tan daṇḍa ikā, vaṅmvaṁ samātra tuvi, tuhātahtuhva:taḥtuvvataḥ, kunaṅ yan sor janmanyasojadmanya ikaṅ anavanakən, alapana ikaṅ kanyā usən, dohakəna sakerysakiyysakiryy umahniṅ lanaṅ. uttamāṁ sevamānas tu jaghanyo vadham arhati | śulkaṁ dadyāt sevamānaḥ samām icchet pitā yadi || MDhŚ 8.366 kunaṅ yan sor janmanyasojadmanya ikaṅ vərəh-vərəhvəR̥-vəR̥ḥ, anavanakən strī uttama, yogya patyanana ikaṅ vərəh-vərəhvəR̥-vəR̥ḥ maṅkana. kunaṅ yan paḍa janmanyajadmanya, kalavan ikaṅtikaṁ kanyā, aveha vəlyanikā ya, ikā ta yantan harəp bapaniṅ kanyā. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. But we note what seems to be a partial parallel in YDh 2.288cd: dūṣaṇe tu karaccheda uttamāyāṁ vadhas tathā. kunaṅ ikaṅ amuṅpaṅ kanyā, tan yogya makarabyanya, rehnyānom dahat, tugəlanatuta tuglana taṅanyātataṅanya:-taṅanya- rehnyānom ... taṅanyā- tah-tatan daṇḍanyaḍaṇḍa, muvahmvaṁ daṇḍanḍaṇḍa: satus paṇa de saṅ prabhu, mā 5ma:, sū, 1, ma:, 4, təkanya, kunaṅ yan mati ikaṅ kanyā denya, yogya patyana ya. abhiṣahya tu yaḥ kanyāṁ kuryād darpeṇa mānavaḥ | tasyāśu kartye aṅgulyau daṇḍaṁ cārhati ṣaṭśatam || MDhŚ 8.367. It seems that our author may have had before him a reading of the Sanskrit text starting with avivāhyāṁ instead of abhiṣahya. ikaṅ bahudhud *aṅrabyani kanyā, tan yogya makastrīnyaOne expects makastryanya. Emend thus?, pan rare dahat, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, śīghra ta tugəlana jarijinya rvaṅ siki, daṇḍa ta ya muvah, nəm atus paṇa, mā, su, 1, mā, 144The same error in the currency conversion had occurred in §186., təkanya.tka:nya || ka || sakāmāṁ dūṣayaṁs tulyo nāṅgulicchedam āpnuyāt | dviśataṁ tu damaṁ dāpyaḥ prasaṅgavinivr̥ttaye || MDhŚ 8.368 ikaṅ vvaṅ paḍa muṅpaṅpaḍa mupaḍa:mupaṁ kanyā, ndan ahyun ikaṅ kanyā, vəkasan pacodyanya, tan yogya tugəlana jarijinya rvaṅ siki, daṇḍan ya rvaṅ atus paṇa de saṅ prabhu, mā, 10, marapvan tan hana tumirva ulahnya maṅkana. kanyaiva kanyāṁ yā kuryāt tasyāḥ syād dviśato damaḥ | śulkaṁ ca triguṇaṁ dadyāc chiphāś caivāpnuyād daśa || MDhŚ 8.369 ikaṅ kanyānduvəlka:nya ḍuvəl *pukiniṅpuniniṁpukinipunikiniṁ kanyā, tanta śīlanya hetu, ika taṅ kanyā maṅkana, yogya daṇḍa rvaṅ atus paṇa de saṅ prabhu, mā, 10, təkanya. kunaṅ yan huvusuvas vinəli ikaṅ kanyā, saguṅiṅguṅiṁ tukvanyatakvanya, triguṇakəna daṇḍanya, tugəlana ta itilnyata tilnya, kapintəlunikapiṁtluni daṇḍanya. yā tu kanyāṁ prakuryāt strī sā sadyo mauṇḍyam arhati | aṅgulyor eva vā chedaṁ khareṇodvahanaṁ tathā || MDhŚ 8.370 kunaṅ ta huvus alaki ikaṅ strī, anduvəlātahanḍuvəlan ta pukiniṅpunikiniṁ kanyā, guntiṅən tumuli, mvaṅ jarijinya rvaṅ siki tugəlanasiki ta tugla:na, konakəna ta ya rabyanana deniṅ kuda, nahan ta daṇḍanya de saṅ prabhu. bhartāraṁ laṅghayed yā tu jñātistrīguṇadarpitā | tāṁ śvabhiḥ khādayed rājā saṁsthāne bahusaṁsthite || MDhŚ 8.371. For b, the edition records a widely attested variant reading strī jñātiguṇadarpitā which might partially underlie the OJ paraphrase. ikaṅ strī maṅalvanakən svāminya, vəgig makanimittākvehkvoḥ kadaṅnya, mvaṅ kvehnimvaḥ kveḥnimvaḥhakveḥni kavruhnya, ikaṅ strī maṅkanakona duṣṭanya,ikaṅ ... duṣṭanya, apusana, konakəna ya sahutəniṅ asuagu riṅ pamaṅgahan, de saṅ prabhu, tontonən kəmbulana deniṅ vvaṅ makveh, maran tan hana tumirva maṅkana. pumāṁsaṁ dāhayet pāpaṁ śayane tapta āyase | abhyādadhyuś ca kāṣṭhāni tatra dahyeta pāpakr̥t || MDhŚ 8.372 ikaṅ lanaṅ uṅgvakəneṅ kavali vəsi, apuyana i sor, gəsəṅanagsəṅa ya de saṅ prabhu, ikaṅ vvaṅ riṅ sabhā paḍa maṅatərana kayu, samāṅgəsəṅanasaṁ maṅgəsəṅana: ikaṅ pāpakarma. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ strī akon lumakvālakya riṅ kanyā, andulurakən kunaṅ, aveha uṅgvaniṅ alakituṅgvaniṁ laki kunaṅ, vəgilan kunaṅ, ikaṅ strī maṅkana katəlu, daṇḍan ya rvaṅ atus paṇa de saṅ prabhu, mā, 10, təkanya, 4000. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vərə-vərəh, huvus amvatihamviti vəlyaniṅ kanyā, *pinasatya-samayakən-smaya§kən· təkaaniṅ śubhadivasa, uṅgahanyahuṅganya, mithyā ta ya, tan paṅantyakənpaṅantikən·, marabi ta ya kili-kili lañji, caṇḍāla, dāsī kunaṅ, atiṅgal paməlinya, ya daṇḍanya, kunaṅ yan ahyunayunayūn anomahahanomahana malihmaniḥ, paməlinya dviguṇākəna ya, akurəna ta ya, aməli piṅrva təkanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ dravya ulihniṅhuliniṁ mandaṇḍa, tan kəkəsana ya de saṅ prabhu, tan beyaaniṅ magave dharma, vehakəna dəmakaniṅmakaniṁ vadva siṅgih donanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ dravya ulihniṅ andaṇḍa saṅhanḍaṇḍa: riṁ saṁ brāhmaṇa, paṇḍita, tan kəkəsana ya, vehakənavahakni riṅ brāhmaṇa, purohitabrahma:-pūrohita:, pilih brāhmaṇa lyanalyan·, saparananya, ndan paḍa lavan saṅ purohita. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ari vadvanvadvak·, kaponakan vadvan, rabiniṅ paman, penan sakiṅ bapa, penan sakiṅ babu, valvaniṅ bapa, valvan saṅvalvaniṁ saṁ brāhmaṇa, nāhannohan lvirnya kaṅ tan yogyālapən, manəmva mahāpātaka təməntmahan ika, kunaṅ yan hana maṅkana, daṇḍa ya de saṅ prabhu, lvirniṅ daṇḍanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ makastrī maṅkana, upasthanya tugəlana, kaninya syukisyuk iṁ uyah, kunaṅ yan saṅ brāhmaṇa mulahakən apacāraapavaraḥ, śīghra dohakəna, maṅkanātah pavarah bhaṭāra manu. Sārasamuccaya 149: kunaṅ yan hana maṅkana daṇḍanya dera saṅ amava bhūmi ndan pastanya tugəlana kaninya syuki uyah. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ vvaṅ amalat mastrya kili, satya suśīlāta saṅsuśila saṁśuśila:, ta saṁ kili, ika ta vvaṅ maṅkana, kadi daṇḍanikaṅ mastrī bhāginyādi daṇḍanyandaṇḍa:nyaḍaṇḍa:. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. kunaṅ yan lañji ikaṅ kili, daṇḍa ikaṅ mastrī ya, uttamasāhasa, de saṅ prabhu, mā, su, 3, mā, 2, 20000, təkanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. kunaṅ ikaṅ strī-strīstri sujanmaśujadma:, alakihalakya:, tan palaki kunaṅ, tanta vehən mahāsāhasa, maṅantya riy umahriṁ humaḥ, pahayun vaṅkəlaṅanavvaṁklaṁhana:vaklaṅgana ikaṅ umah, kahananyakalanya:, yeka prasiddha umah, liṅ bhaṭāra manu. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. ikaṅ marery umahniṅ len riṅ vəṅi, ndan hanestri-ndaneṁstri-ndan hanaistri-kahyunya hetu, ikaṅ vvaṅ maṅkana, sevu paṇa daṇḍaanya, de saṅ prabhu, mā, su, 3, mā, 2, 20000, təkanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. kunaṅ yan rahina kālanya mara, ndatan strī kahyunya hetu, pūrvasāhasa daṇḍaanya, de saṅ prabhu, mā, 12, ku, 2ṅa, təkanya. No Sanskrit stanza has been identified as corresponding to the following prose. yantan pamava sañjata, ikaṅ vvaṅ marerymareyymareṁyyIt is notable that all witnesses transmit yy instead of expected ryy. umahniṅ len riṅ rahina, uttamasāhasa ḍaṇḍaanyaḍaṇḍanyaḍaṇḍa:nya, mā, su, 3, mā, 2, təkanya. yasya stenaḥ pure nāsti nānyastrīgo na duṣṭavāk | na sāhasikadaṇḍaghnau sa rājā śakralokabhāk || MDhŚ 8.386 ika saṅ prabhu, tan hana maliṅ riṅri kaḍatvanira, tan hanārabi-rabihanarabi-rabiana:rabi-rabianarabi-rabiIt is impossible to be sure from the manuscript evidence whether our author intended hana rabi-rabi or hanārabi-rabi. We opt for the latter as it makes the paraphrase agree with the meaning of the Sanskrit original; moreover, the phrase arabi laraṅan is attested in Dharma Pātañjala (ed. Acri 2017, p. 262, l. 14). laraṅan, muvah tan hana hala ujarnya, tan hanatan ajar iṁ sastra:, kūnaṁ yan handaliḥ lvaṁ tan hana ha:pisor, vinalik ṣadya, vnaṁ juga pinaten· || 0 || kunaṁ voṁ dinlaliḥ hatarvaṇna:, dūruṁ hamatyani sadūjana, kevala: hamanasi voṁ, yan hamarihaṅkən·, vnaṁ ya pinaten·, yan tan hamarihaṅkəni, vnaṁ tinunduṁ, dohakna haneṅ rajyanira: saṁ prabhū, hayva vineḥ mapaR̥k·, hapan voṁṅ abicaruka: || 0 || voṁ kinuṅkuṁṅan denekaṁṅ adr̥ve niṣṭa:, dadi hana voṁṅ len·, pitvi sanak mitra⌈ne, tūmiñjo mapaR̥k· rikaṁ kinuṅkuṁ, tan sumdək hamit rikaṁṅ adr̥ve niṣṭa:, sahuṅku⌈reṁ liṅgar· hikaṁ niṣṭa:, yan samaṅkana, tampuha:kna Ikaṁ mapaR̥k· riṁ kaṁ niṣṭa:, samala:niṁ voṁ niṣṭa: hapan voṁ Ina viyoga, kapasuk· sakara: Itta: kojarriṁ sa:stra || 0 || tatanira: saṁ ratū, hamava ra:t·, tan vənaṁ sira: haṅR̥ṅə hiṁṅ atūr-hatūr voṁṅ avicara:, yan ḍuruṁ kabhavaraṣa riṁṅ ūpapati, phala:nya cəṇḍək pamuktyanira: saṁ prabhu, hapan hiṅimur riṁṅ acəṅil·, ma{*}dəg keṅaṁ brahma: durga kala:na pati praṅ-praṅapraṁ-praṁṅana, ika ta saṅ prabhu maṅkana kramanira, tan hana pahinirapatiniraA roman hand (possibly van der Tuuk's) in corrected ti to hi. kalavan bhaṭāra indra kaḍatvanira,tan hana ... bhaṭāra indra kaḍatvanira, paḍa lavan svargapaḍa lavan· bhaṭa:ra Indra kadatvanira, pada lavan· svargga:. eteṣāṁ nigraho rājñaḥ pañcānāṁ viṣaye svake | sāṁrājyakr̥t sajātyeṣu loke caiva yaśaskaraḥ || MDhŚ 8.387 saṅ prabhu umaṅguhakənUmaṅgvaknhamaṅguhakn ikaṅ rājya uttama, makanimitta paṅdaṇḍanira riṅ durjana, corādi, ririṁ svadeśanira, lumrā yaśanira riṅ loka. iti strīsaṅgrahaṇacarita.Before the postcolophon, adds hayva tuduḥ-tuduḥ kiva harane kidul·, tka:niṁ pasir ||.

Translation

When the king is going to try a case, he should enter the court modestly accompanied by Brahmins and counselors who are experts in policy Now should his Majesty undertake to attend to litigation/affairs of this world, let him take as companions Brahmins who are knowledgeable and study Scripture, and likewise ministers with the wisdom to judge with discernment; with good conduct, he should enter the council.

Commentary

Bibliography

For the first time critically edited here by Arlo Griffiths & Timothy Lubin. Some excerpts from this text were included in van der Tuuk’s KBNW and some of those were taken over by Zoetmulder. The text has been mentioned in a small number of secondary writings (van Naerssen, Creese).

Bibliography

Olivelle, Patrick. 2005. Manu's code of law: A critical edition and translation of the Mānava-Dharmásāstra. New York: Oxford University Press.

Mandlik, Vishvanáth Náráyan. 1886. Mánava-dharma śástra [institutes of Manu], with the commentaries of Medhátithi, Sarvajñanáráyaṇa, Kúllúka, Rághavánanda, Nandana, and Rámachandra, and an appendix. 2 vols. Bombay: Ganpat Krishnaji's Press. [URL].

Editions

Hooykaas, Christiaan. 1931. Tantri Kāmandaka: Een Oudjavaansche Pañtjatantra-bewerking in tekst en vertaling. Bibliotheca Javanica 2. Bandoeng: A. C. Nix. [URL].